JP5951830B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the game board, and a number of obstacle nails, windmills, winning holes (for example, a start opening, a general winning opening, a big winning opening, etc.) and an effect display are provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) provided with a device or the like is known. In such a gaming machine, if the game ball that is driven into the game area abuts against the obstacle nail or windmill and changes the flow direction of the game ball and wins the start opening as a winning opening, will it be a big hit? A lottery process of NO is performed. If the lottery result is a big win, the prize winning opening that is closed during normal times is opened, and a large number of prize balls are awarded for a short time by allowing game balls to enter the prize winning opening. A jackpot game that can be won at is played. Also, if the lottery result is a promising big hit out of the jackpots, after the jackpot game is played, the probability of the jackpot game occurring in the subsequent lottery process (so-called jackpot probability) is set higher than usual By controlling to the high probability state (so-called probabilistic variation state), it becomes a more advantageous state for the player.

  Also, in recent years, even if the lottery process results in a promising big jackpot (so-called latent probabilistic big jackpot), whether or not the lottery process after the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability state is determined by the effect display device. A gaming machine that does not notify is proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, since it is not possible to determine whether or not the probable big hit is only by visually recognizing the effect display device, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, We were able to raise expectations for the outbreak.

JP 2010-246811 A

However, in the above-described gaming machine, there is a concern that the interest of the game is reduced.
This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, The place made into the objective is to provide the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of a game entertainment attraction .

Means 1: After the start condition is satisfied, a variable display device is provided for variably displaying the symbol information based on the start condition being satisfied to display and display the display result. When the predetermined winning condition is satisfied, the variable display is performed. After deriving and displaying the specific display result on the device, in a gaming machine that controls to a profit granting state that gives a profit to the player,
Random number updating means for updating multiple types of random numbers;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring each random number updated by the random number update means when the start condition is satisfied;
A pre-determination unit that determines whether the winning condition is satisfied based on a winning random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring unit when the start condition is satisfied;
A preceding effect executing means for executing a preceding effect suggesting an expectation degree that the winning condition is satisfied based on a determination result of the prior determination means between the start condition and the start condition being satisfied;
Each random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, random number storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number so that the order of acquisition can be specified;
When the start condition is satisfied, a start win determination means for determining whether the winning condition is satisfied based on a winning random number for which the start condition is satisfied among the winning random numbers stored in the random number storage means;
When the winning condition determination unit determines that the winning condition is not satisfied, the display result of the variable display device is based on a reach random number that satisfies the start condition among reach random numbers stored in the random number storage unit. Start reach determination means for determining whether or not to form a reach mode;
When it is determined that the winning condition is satisfied by the start time determining means, the display result of the variable display device is determined as the specific display result, and the starting condition is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied. When the start reach determination means determines that the reach mode is to be formed, the non-specific display result with the reach mode among the non-specific display results that are different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display device. If the winning condition determining means determines that the winning condition is not satisfied and the starting reach determining means determines that the reach mode is not to be formed, the display result of the variable display device is A symbol determining means for determining a non-specific display result without the reach mode among the specific display results;
Display control means for variably displaying the symbol information on the variable display device, and for deriving and displaying a display result determined by the symbol determination means;
When it is determined that the winning condition is established by the start time winning determination means and the profit granting state is controlled, a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is generated after the profit granting state is ended. A gaming state control means capable of executing control,
The gaming state control means includes
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute control to generate a specific game state different from both the normal game state and the special game state,
The prior determination means includes
Prior reach determination means for determining whether or not to form the reach mode based on the reach random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means when it is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied when the start condition is satisfied; ,
A reach random number determined to form the reach mode by the advance reach determination unit when the special gaming state is controlled is classified into a first reach determination group, and the advance reach determination unit determines the reach state when controlling the specific gaming state. Reach random numbers determined to form a reach mode are classified into the first reach determination group or a second reach determination group different from the first reach determination group, and the prior reach determination is performed when controlling the normal gaming state. The reach random number determined to form the reach mode by means is different from the first reach determination group or the second reach determination group or the first reach determination group and the second reach determination group. Pre-reach determination group classification means for classifying into reach determination groups of
The preceding effect is
The game is executed in any of the special game state, the specific game state, and the normal game state,
Based on either the first reach determination group, the second reach determination group, or the third reach determination group classified by the advance reach determination group classification means, execution is performed at a different rate depending on each gaming state A gaming machine characterized by being played.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest .

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 46 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 48 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box part). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the payout control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of back view of the pachinko machine which shows the wiring etc. of a payout control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of a game board for illustrating a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which opened the cover body. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the state where a cover body concerning a second embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps and contacts the lower part of the cover object concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left rear. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structural member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at what was decomposed | disassembled from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled every apparatus with which a game panel is mounted | worn for each member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the start port unit for every member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the starting port unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front side decoration unit of the start port unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the reel unit of the starting port unit from diagonally forward, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the reel unit from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel unit from the diagonally front exploded. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part at the time of cut | disconnecting a reel unit in the up-down direction center from diagonally forward. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a reel unit. FIG. 4 is a development view of a reel sheet of a reel unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the left side prize winning opening member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side prize winning opening member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side winning opening member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side prize winning opening member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the left side guidance member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structural member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the decoration part of the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center baseplate of the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the big winning opening unit of the center character from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the big prize port unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is a front view which shows the relationship between each accessory apparatus and the display screen of a liquid crystal display device. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper side accessory apparatus from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper side accessory apparatus for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable decoration body of the upper accessory apparatus from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable decoration body for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left side part at the time of cut | disconnecting an upper movable decoration body in the center in the left-right direction from diagonally forward, (b) is an enlarged perspective view of the drive part in an upper movable decoration body. It is a right view which shows operation | movement of the head guard in an upper movable decoration body. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering drive unit of the upper accessory apparatus for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at what was decomposed | disassembled from diagonally behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right side accessory apparatus from diagonally forward, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the state which the right movable ornament moved to the production position from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side accessory apparatus for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at what was decomposed | disassembled from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side movable decoration body of the right side accessory apparatus, and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism part of the right side accessory apparatus, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is typical explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a right movable ornament. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left side accessory apparatus from diagonally forward, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the state which the left movable ornament moved to the production position from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side accessory apparatus for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the shelf unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the shelf unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the left side part at the time of cut | disconnecting a shelf unit in the vertical direction from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable shelf and its mechanism part from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the liquid crystal display device from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back box, the liquid crystal display device, and the liquid crystal edge decoration from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back box and the passage cover, and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate etc. which were arrange | positioned at the back side of a back box, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is the schematic explaining the detection area | region of a magnetic sensor. It is an input circuit to which a detection signal from a magnetic sensor is input. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the production pre-determination process, and (B) is a table for prefetch type details determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display surface of a 1st special symbol display, (B) is a figure which shows an example of the display surface of a 2nd special symbol display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pending | holding advance notice control process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hold notice determination table at the time of hold 1 lighting used for the hold notice effect control process, and (B) is a hold notice determination table at the time of hold 2 light used for the hold notice effect control process. (C) is a hold notice determination table at the time of hold 3 lighting used for the hold notice effect control process, and (D) is a hold notice determination table at the time of hold 4 lighting used for the hold notice effect control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect performed with a liquid crystal display device during a big hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process performed as one process of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the magnet goto notification determination process performed as one process of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start opening prize abnormality alerting process performed as one process of 16 ms regular process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which carries out the variable display of a decoration symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the other production | presentation which carries out the variable display of a decoration symbol.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. 4, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and a game area 605 that is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing a ball to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 on the lower front side thereof. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the hitting ball launcher 650 (see FIG. 5) and the door frame 5 and the main body excluding the game board 4 are provided at the lower part of the back surface thereof. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical components provided in the frame 3 are collectively provided is attached, and covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3. A cover body 1250 is detachably provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, and the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 10, a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12A, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD. , E-E sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes an upper and lower upper frame plate 10 and a lower frame plate 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. , 13 are connected in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 formed on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right lowered by one step of the connecting member 19. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, the recessed portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The concave portion 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the upper portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are connected to each other. The main body frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by disengagement.

  Further, the cover reinforcing bracket 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when the cover reinforcing bracket 14 is closed. The front and side surfaces of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support metal 45 and the cover reinforcement metal 14 which also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support flange 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support holes formed in (see FIG. 72) are inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  A hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 is provided on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. Are fastened with fastening screws 32 to fix the upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support fitting 45. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Further, when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, a lock member 80 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed as shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46. A drooping wall 46a is formed. The drooping wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and when viewed from the front, the lock member 80, which will be described below, cannot be visually recognized to improve the appearance. Then, the lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed to be bent so as to be inclined slightly toward the inside from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

  The hanging wall 46 a described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the entrance end portion in front of the support pothole 47, and the support pothole 47. A stop drooping portion 47a is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion of the front. A mounting hole 46 b is formed in the approximate center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46 b. The lock member 80 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46 a, and the stopper portion 80 a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support rod hole 47.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a, the support hole 47 is formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a that are located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are opposed to each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support rod hole 47. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that it smoothly rotates when the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip end face 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support flange 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protrusion 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support flange 47. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elasticity formed integrally with the synthetic resin. The plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 504 can be prevented from falling off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a of the locking member 80 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 46 (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a Does not rotate in such a direction that it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 47a and disengages further, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80), so Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 81 of the lock member 80 is set to the inside of the support protrusion 46, the shaft support pin 504 is inclined with respect to the support collar hole 47. When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the hole, and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. Component force F1 acting on the component (normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since the side only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force is such that the shaft support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the end faces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the abutting portion between the pivot pin 504 and the end faces 80e and 80f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where no rotation occurs or a position where a rotational moment is generated where the lock member 80 rotates its tip end toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a is stopped. Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 80 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a even when the 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in a frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), the lock member 80 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 80 c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support rod hole 47. Then, when the pivot pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 47, The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support rod hole 47. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support rod hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 47. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 45, and since it has a very simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 80e, 80f, the shaft supporting pin 504 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 80e and 80f, or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 80c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view in which the right unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit is exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which FIG. 28 is seen from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to a lower left decorative board 190 fixed to the lower left side of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and a ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball extraction path cover 191 that closes the ball extraction path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door decoration drive. A door decoration drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring receiving groove 110b formed on the rear side of 110 and capable of receiving wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal board 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which metal sheets are assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 has a plurality of LEDs 190a mounted on the front surface thereof, so that the left end portion of the later-described dish unit 300 can be decorated with light emission. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, such as an electrical component and an electrical component provided on the door frame 5 (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board, speakers 121 and 391, etc. Wiring from the switch, the ball rental unit 301, the operation button unit 370, etc. are connected together and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of the main control board box 624 attached to the prize ball payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths of the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of a reinforcing sheet metal 140 which will be described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light-emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated illumination part 122 and an acoustic part 130 having a side speaker 121 disposed above and below the illumination part 122 in each of the left and right units. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123, and the side illumination lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover A flash lens 128 having translucency to close the 27 flash openings 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination board 126, and high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. Each white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration board 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on 126 can be irradiated forward through the opening 125 a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  In addition, a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side is formed in the side electric decoration reflector 124 at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens is formed in the lens concave portion 124c from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. The electrical decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit light strongly before the LED 126a emits light by the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that lights only after both ends shine.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker decoration 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and have a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in a front view includes a decoration 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic section 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and the head of the player who plays the game is more or less. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left and right positions, so that each side speaker 121 has independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and 2.1ch surround including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with a screw or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on its upper surface, and its lower surface A lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed. The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 that is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 that are bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes open side outward bent protrusions 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later is attached to the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the pivotal support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the upright wall 165 is for preventing the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171 a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110 c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and the joint unit 180 is housed in the state where the slide body 182 is housed. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface. In addition, a pair of attachment holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is positioned substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 31B, only the lower abutment protrusion 110g is shown, and the upper abutment protrusion 110g is not shown).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, the rear face wall is provided with two guide protrusions 182a projecting a predetermined amount rearward and arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and below the right guide protrusion 182a in the rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a that guide the movement of the slide body, an insertion lateral hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and in this state, the cover body 184 is covered from the front. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the coating, by screwing into the mounting hole 110f with the screw through the mounting hole 184d, the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 34A is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the center rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 34)

  Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a, motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and boards 248 in the top lamp lighting unit 200. , 268, 288, 296, LED 453a of a glass unit 450 described later, and the like, for supplying power from a power supply board 1136 (described later) via a relay. Further, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285, etc. of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. This is for driving based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221 i protruding from the front side to the rear from the top lamp reflector unit 220 while the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side through the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is inserted through the connector opening 213. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, a board attachment portion 214 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration driving board 206 is attached to the board attachment portion 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical part 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined part 221b (see FIG. 33). ). The reflector base 210 is provided with a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. The reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e as shown in the figure. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening portion 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially horizontal center. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210, and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a sandwiched between upper and lower protruding pieces, and a protruding piece 222e protruding rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration board 226 is an ultra-bright LED, and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. A base part 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshes with the rotating lamp base gear 243, covers the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 from above, and covers the rotating lamp base gear 243 from the rotating portion base 242. The rotating unit holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and supported on the lower surface of the rotating unit holder 247 is coaxial with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. A mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft tube is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft tube into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. In other words, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotating lamp base 242a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 247 are provided by the rotating lamp base 242a. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 has an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward at an upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided, and the attachment step portion 261b is rotated from above. The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotating lamp base 262a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 267 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 267 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the right rotation position detection substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 262b of the rotation unit base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection board 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotating part base 262 and the rotating part holder 267.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the figure, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 273a, an opening portion 273b drilled in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, so that the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 273 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotating axis of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 that is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward. And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotating lamp base 282a of the rotating part base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287 are used. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the center rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decoration board 296 to emit light.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the dish unit and the ball rental unit after removing the dish unit. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit in an exploded view from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit board removed, and FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tray unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the tray unit. It is. Moreover, FIG. 63 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long spherical inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish unit 300 covers a front surface of the dish body 310 and a dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open at the top and rear and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-like dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the plate 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 that operates, a control button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the plate 310 and that can be operated by the player in accordance with a game state (game situation), and a plate unit main body 320 below the plate 310 dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. A handle base 303 to be arranged and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation are mainly provided. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the later-described dish unit main body 320. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative board 190 for illuminating and decorating the left end of the dish unit main body 320 is disposed on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) that is arranged between the lending button 301a and the returning button 301b and displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the lending machine. When the ball rental unit 301 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with cash or a prepaid card and the ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and when the return button 301b is pushed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes.

  Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when a player participates in game contents (game effects) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[1-2C-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage tray 312 to be connected to the storage tray 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is disposed on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a that is lowered toward the right side and the front side in plan view, and a right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear portion of the second portion and decreases toward the right side and the rear side, and a third inclined surface that is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with a front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; A fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end portion of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between the partition wall 311f where the rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage plate 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e and It distribute | circulates on the 5 inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to once detour to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is like that.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. Note that a stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion is slanted to the lower right and then is dropped downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is inserted and arranged to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a first sphere described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere extraction path 313 across the slide groove 316a. A flange portion 316b for locking the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting port 321d for mounting the handle base 303 at the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e that is disposed above the handle base mounting port 321d and faces a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge opening 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction. I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the speaker opening 322a. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punched metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and four corners cut off, and is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been subjected to plating, a right decoration 325 that is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and a main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-like plate made of punching metal and disposed at the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321. A left cover 326, a plate-like left decoration base 327 disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the left cover 326, which is smaller than the left cover 326 and plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and a front surface of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape that is arranged substantially at the center and decorates the periphery of the left decoration 328 that is smaller and plate-like than the left decoration base 327, the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321. The main body 329 is mainly provided. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker openings 321a of the main body 321 as desired. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  The plate unit main body 320 of the present example has a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190, and a front surface of the main body left decoration base 330 and a metallic luster plating on the surface. And a main body left decoration 331 that has been processed. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 190 a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body portion 321 and a duct cutout portion 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to metallic luster plating on the surface.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decoration board 336 having a plurality of color LEDs 336a mounted thereon. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is in a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball, a ball supply port 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the ball inlet 341 in a lower right direction and passes in a shape that allows a game ball to pass through, and a rear that communicates with the ball inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the spherical inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is a predetermined amount behind the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and allows game balls to circulate. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the back plate 340 has a spherical flow path opening 345 corresponding to a ball extraction path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 to be described later and penetrating in a substantially L shape. A latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrating in a section shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of a second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted; In addition, the wire insertion port 347 that is disposed in the upper right corner portion when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially section shape, and the ball rental unit 301 that is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inflow port 341 and the wire insertion port 346 are attached. A ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351, which are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The lower end of the plate body 311 and supported by the first ball removal mechanism support 316 of the plate body 311 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game ball that has circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the biasing force of the first ball extraction spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage dish 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position for closing the second ball outlet 312 and an open position for opening the second ball outlet 312 A second ball-extracting shutter 364, a second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and a second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) that rotatably supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing part 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar part that extends from the closing part 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P-shape as a whole. The second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially intermediate portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball extraction spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball extraction shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball | bowl extraction shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shape of a shallow dish, as shown in the figure, and can form an accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 with the dish body 310. Yes. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal shutter 364 rotates to turn the second ball removal port 312. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the urging force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. Thus, the game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second projection of the second ball removal slide 362 is pushed by the second ball removal button 361 so that the pair of engagement protrusions 362b in the latch unit 366 are a pair. Contact between the two engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball removal spring 365 is resisted against the biasing force of the second ball removal spring 365. The state where the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in the opened (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of octagonal main buttons 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view, and a left base button 372L and a right sub button 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. The sub button 372, the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are slidably held in the vertical direction, and the operation button unit base 373 inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and the operation button unit base 373 A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface and an operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in a plan view, and a main button housing recess 373a that can house the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the vertical direction to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and the sub A pair of sub button housing recesses 373e capable of housing the button 372 from above, and formed at the diagonal upper corner of the long axis A plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall part 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having an open lower surface by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a is formed with a thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and is also formed by the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical light guide opening 373d. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be diffused widely, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape similar to that of the main button lens 371, whereas the main button base 371b is a cone whose lower end is narrowed downward from a substantially middle portion in the vertical direction. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this example pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The main button sensor 376 detects the operation after entering. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The operation button unit base 373 is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodation recess 373e and the bottom surface of the sub button base 372b and the sub button accommodation recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs down in the front-rear direction across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs down from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure, and the main button lens 371a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the long axis diagonal line, and through this mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373. The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. In addition, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctioned, The plate body 310 can be easily detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower portion. A box-like speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position to the rear of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 at a position on the right side of the front face in a front view. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 due to vibration of the lower speaker 391 It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it has become possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in previous gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball that has been played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by a ball passage cover 191 that closes the ball passage passage opening 110. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotation shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotation motion of the rotation shaft 415 to a slide motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Inserted and fixed to 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko machine 1, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. Thus, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410 and can easily perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable in the rotation operation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

  A cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and a cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the retracted state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanted cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the state described above, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (outer front surface). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 62 and FIG. In this example, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage dish 311 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball communication rod 343 of the back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position that substantially faces the spherical inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper portion (right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e The outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f are surrounded by the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to return to the fourth inclined surface 311d disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop paying out the game ball, or the game ball launching operation at the ball launcher 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. Can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and a prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 is awarded. When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800 and the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800 is stopped. The ball launching device 650 stops the game ball launching operation. In particular, when the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to dispose the game balls from the storage tray 311 below the tray unit 300. Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is operated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so that there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes from the ball outlet 321g through the ball outlet 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 62B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Accordingly, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 111) is activated and the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball is stopped even though the hitting operation is stopped, and the game may not be continued. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game that is in big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and there are almost no game balls on the first inclined surface 311a, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b, which is reflected from the outer peripheral wall 311h and flows in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launch operation of the ball launcher 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. The ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower as viewed in the right direction (sphere supply port 342). Thus, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball communication rod 343 flows into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced, resulting in clogging of the balls. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inlet 341 moves in the left-right direction. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62B).

  In addition, in the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341, the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage dish 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. In addition to being able to prevent the lowering, the game balls flowing in from the top promote the lateral movement of the lower game balls (especially the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340), and naturally Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the storage tray 300 of the present example allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the shelf of the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are caused to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311 and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the front-rear direction of the unit frame 451, a terminal plate support portion 451d that protrudes leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery that is above the center in the vertical direction Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decorative substrate and is supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the end of the glass decorative substrate 453 is fixed to the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454. And a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451 a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can appropriately decorate the light emission between the two glass plates 452 by causing the LED 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light appropriately, and has an atmosphere different from conventional pachinko machines ( A pachinko machine 1 having a gaming window 101 (with a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting backward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime projecting projecting piece 474 on the shaft support side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the lower side, but the half of the open side of the post-crime projection 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the pre-crime projection piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path portion from hitting the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 75 is a perspective view as seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. .

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4 Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in 3 and a power supply board 1136 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 71) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side portion of the front surface is bent with the long side ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 attached and fixed to the rear surface of the upper side portion of the door frame 5 facing rearward. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back toward the rear at both long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also works well, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 for allowing a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 to protrude forward is opened. In addition, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the tip is inserted are provided. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed at the approximate center of the game board placement section 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the base plate 4. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 71) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 at a side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. In other words, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that is linked to the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end surface of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through-hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then going downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full unit 900 (see FIG. 71), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, an outlet for damming a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper side of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear side of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 75) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed so as to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided at 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 in a rearward direction substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and that is provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to protrude inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably mounted on the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 if there is a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 68) into which a locking projection 1004 (described later) of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws, but also by a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the locking device 1000 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engaging protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost bottom surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and the rear of the shaft support side by the engaging protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The face wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 (see FIGS. 74 and 139), and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in the figure. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the responsible person having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 bent rearward are formed. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 110d with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder in the assembled state, cut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 83 is a front component that mainly constitutes the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel, the panel holder, and the like exploded and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed obliquely from the rear. Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment includes a transparent plate-like gaming panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and the gaming panel 600 through the panel holder 630. The front component 601 is attached to the front so as to surround the game area 605, and the function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) is fixed to the rear side of the front component 601. On the surface of the gaming panel 600, various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 605. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 is formed with a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end portion thereof, and a foul port adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. In addition, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop portion 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The security protrusion 608 overlaps with the rear end protrusion 475 of the security rear end projecting on the security cover 470 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 474 protruding from the security cover 470 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlaps vertically. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the positioning recess 611 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576, The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the gaming board 4 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the gaming board 4 (more precisely, A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hanging the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the game board 4 has an outer shape in which notch portions 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the foul port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided. Further, a function display seal 649 is affixed to the upper side of the lower right certificate stamp affixing portion 615 of the front component 601.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the game board 4, balls that have won a prize in various gaming devices (for example, general prize opening 2004, 2102, 2155, start opening 2001, 2002, grand prize opening 2330a, etc.) provided in the game area 605 are downstream. A liquid crystal control board 3181 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151, etc.) as a display device arranged at the approximate center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 that can be guided side by side. A peripheral board box 622 in which the peripheral control board 4140 is accommodated is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction that is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. Formed), and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 for storing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186, a power board 1136, and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component / game panel / panel holder / panel back plate]
Next, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 600 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 630, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball in the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630. It mainly includes a front component member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 600 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin. . The gaming panel 600 is thinner than the panel holder 630 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when a failure nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 600 has a plurality of fitting holes 600a that are formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 600c each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 600c is formed by cutting out substantially half of the thickness of the game panel 600, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  The game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Further, the gaming panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with the center accessory 2300, the start port unit 2000, and the like, and are fixed to these. A fixing hole is formed at an appropriate position. Note that the openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and since the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 is connected, the strength of the gaming panel 600 is determined by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The panel holder 630 has a thickness of a member (for example, a game board base) made of wooden plywood in the game board of a conventional pachinko machine. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 630 includes a holding step portion 630a that holds the gaming panel 600 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It mainly includes a through-hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 600, and the front surface of the gaming panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding inner side 630a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size that allows a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) to be formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. This clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to a temperature change or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of protruding pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the game panel 600 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the gaming panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the gaming panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that are engaged with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claws 630d are disposed on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 and correspond to the upper engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. The holding step 630a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engagement piece 630e is disposed in the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 to be inserted is formed, the panel 600 extends along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement pieces 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 includes a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly below the lower side and the outer peripheral edge. Is provided. The mounting support portion 630g causes the rear surface of the panel holder 630 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 630h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. The holder 630 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 630h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621) formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 630j. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 630j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the inner diameter of the hole is mixed, and depending on the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be fixed, 630j may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 630l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the thinned portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface. The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is formed with a thinned portion 630 l, so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 630. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 630 is formed with a obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 630.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing back portion 635 are accommodated in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 630. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 630b over substantially the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600 in the present example, the gaming panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claws 630d and the engaging pieces 630e, By engaging the engagement step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the gaming panel 600, and the gaming panel 600 and the front side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 600 in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting apparatus, and to install the obstacle nail planting apparatus. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the prize opening, etc. is changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing gaming panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front constituent member 601 can be used as common parts. The panel holder 630, the front constituent member 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the gaming panel 600 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 4 that can be used for various types of machines by simply replacing them.

  Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various mounting units such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear side of the panel holder 630 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 630 is designed so as to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 630j, so that the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model. It can be made into parts.

  In the present embodiment, in the game board 4, a transparent game panel 600 that forms the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630. However, as with conventional pachinko machines, 600 may be integrated with the panel holder 630 and may be formed of wooden plywood such as a veneer board.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for panel]
Next, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. This board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630. As shown in the figure, the board holder 623 has a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and the bottom is the front side at the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this case, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600 can be received and discharged downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and beside the main control board box mounting portion 623a (on the right side in the rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is sealed to the horizontal sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 It can be visually confirmed whether or not it has been illegally removed.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display board 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a second special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures as special symbols, the first of the start-up unit 2000 described later. When a game ball wins at the start port 2001, the segment indicator SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball wins at the second start port 2002, the segment indicator SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. It has become.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won in the first starting port 2001 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both the indicators 643 are lit and the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 flash. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. It has become. Specifically, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both of the indicators 644 are turned on and the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit. When the number of the holding balls is four, the second special symbol memory display Both units 644 flash.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when a game ball passes through a gate 2201 of a gate member 2200 described later, a predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

  Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened / closed) The game symbol which is not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing 2201) is turned on by the normal symbol memory display 646 with the number of the game balls passed as the holding number. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED that can light up red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the color to be lit as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

  Further, a 2-round display lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the two-round display lamp 648a lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the special winning opening 2333a is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 648b lights up and notifies that there are 15 rounds.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol memory display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol memory display 646, a game status indicator 647, and a round indicator 648 are assigned to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the gaming state display 647, and the round display 648, segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is provided with segment display openings 601c at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, so that the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display sticker 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display sticker 649. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface by being grouped into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing part 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol change display by winning the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 sets the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644. These second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or displays the number of winning game balls as the number of reserves in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby changing the special symbol display by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether the movable piece 2005 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the movable piece 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second start port 2002. It becomes easy to win. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. Stars are printed so that they can be distinguished from the game display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, at the positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648, as shown in FIG. 88, the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds, the round indicator 648 is printed with a value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 648a, and a position corresponding to the 15-round display lamp 648b. Is printed with a value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the gaming status indicator 647 displays the lighting color as the gaming status, thereby notifying that the gaming status has a probability variation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 648a has the big prize opening 2333a. The fact that the number of times (rounds) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 648b lights and notifies that the round is 15 times. Thus, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL4. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 648a that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 648b which is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by the solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649, and the gaming status indicator 647, round indicator The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display 647 and the round display 648.

  As described above, the function display seal 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker pasting portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIGS. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from erroneously attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thereby, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko machine, the development period of the pachinko machine has been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) that the special winning opening 2333a is in the open state from the closed state is 2 times or 15 times. In addition to adding 5 round display lamps and 8 round display lamps that light up and notify that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, depending on the case of reducing the number of starting ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. The seal management number 649a can be confirmed by visual observation, and the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is an overall perspective view (A) of the hit ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hit ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 93 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball hitting device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 that gives reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. In addition, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In this working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. Is provided on a mounting portion 660 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner at 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a protruding manner is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Thus, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 protrudes from the front back surface side of the base plate 690, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and an enlarged motor mounting boss 661 that extends forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 that are integrally formed and are accommodated inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 mesh with each other and the ball hitting device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts against the front side wall in the slide direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92A, the left space inner wall Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described. 93, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 94) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 656 of the slide member 710.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the hitting ball launching device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanting cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state where one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is determined. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  Further, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is protruded. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 74, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 that stores the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper portion of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 97, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge port 730A , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to this embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two paths 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed at the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball path unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view seen from the back of the ball passage unit 770, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is an easy-to-understand illustration of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841, and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of this example, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. Left and right bent passage portions 772b bent in the direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back), and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. Since it is in a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 of the frame 3 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 to the back surface side, a winning ball guide projection protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in a circular arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 105B). The state shown in FIG. 105 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 105A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  106, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, an intra-prize ball relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825. And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. In other words, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but on the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided ball is guided to a ball disconnection passage 880 to be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attachment / detachment button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted at one end to the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and a shaft that is drilled in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is provided on the unit sub-plate 825 above the second gear 844. A shaft 848 press-fitted into the formed shaft hole 849 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end portion of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with each other about the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked up and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824, an engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that a sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivot projection 911 as viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. In addition, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the exit 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. When the number of payout balls is about the normal, the spring 913 has a strong resilience, so that the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock. As shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame. Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, a locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a locking base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment by making the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. A screwing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the upper and middle sides 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 and is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed so as to project from the upper end portion and the intermediate portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. Can be fixed. The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 to a corresponding screw with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment board 1011. The lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. You can get it. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, a slanting portion 1024 is an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 125B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protrusion 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the protruding piece 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. It is intended to prevent sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The uppermost rivet slot in the rivet slot 1042 A guide protrusion 1043 protrudes below 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding motion of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the abutting portion 1067 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is smooth without any backlash. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as that shown in FIG. 124A), but the hook portion 1054 is in the raised state. , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3, so that the lower side inclined part of the door frame hook part 1041 becomes the hook cover 158. The door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 close the closed space Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hooks 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view as seen from the front side of the substrate holder for the frame which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing the connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 shows the payout control board and the board unit. of FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. Various substrates such as a door relay substrate 1102, a power supply substrate box 1103, a terminal substrate box 1104, a payout control substrate box 1105, a main drawer relay substrate 1107, and a sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the resin-molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high-temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 that houses the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 in the present embodiment has a shield heat dissipation as shown in FIG. 127 and FIG. The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, the malfunctioning of the payout control board 1186 accommodated in the payout control board box 1105 by the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as that of the present embodiment between the lower and upper substrate boxes.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board recess 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. In addition, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixed with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  Note that a large amount of rearward protrusion is formed from the other end side of the region to which the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed in the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hung on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the structure of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed to be spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and provided. The junction guide hole 1126 and the guide hole 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Insertion guide protrusions 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the attachment hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection terminal. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power board box 1103 attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with an engagement locking hole 1135 that engages with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, on the portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power line connector 1138, the CR unit power connector 1139, and the ground A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electrical devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The ground connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic ground wires provided in the pachinko machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector to do. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 3181 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and a region having a high step is an attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 1105 together with the above-described delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the payout control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  Further, in the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 132, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are used for various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The information signal is mainly sent from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connection of the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. The The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko machine 1, for example. . The power ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is the power board 1136. The wiring from one earth connector 1140 of the plurality of earth connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal plate 1150b to be relayed are accommodated, and these are conventionally accommodated in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 4, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. Reference will be made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Further, the dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (the right side in FIG. 132). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  In addition, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. Further, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are protruded from the drawer mounting area 1120. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed in rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, of the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board that is exchanged with the change of the game board 4 is used. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 3181, a power board 1136 housed in the power board box 1103, an external terminal board 1150 housed in the terminal board box 1104, and a delivery control board box 1105. The dispense control board 1186 thus assembled is preassembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3 by a simple operation. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of frame 3. It can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 138, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is removed from the main body frame when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. The harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed in the approximate center on the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It performs the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are matched and fixed with a screw (not shown), whereby the cover body 1250 is attached to the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 1250 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment, viewed from the back in a state in which the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is attached with the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, and is a perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the present invention is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body. FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the dispensing control board box that is in contact with the lower side of the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 146 shows the second It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above. The shape of the provided dish unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 569 having a later-described locking hole 568, locking hole 569a, and guide hole 569b formed on the open end side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 (see FIG. 144), and The third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall are different in that the positions of the cutout portions 221 extend downward (see FIG. 140). Also in the configuration, the only difference is that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 139 and FIG. 144, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  First, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape with a slightly vertically long peripheral side wall standing up (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) pivot pins 1301 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 1302 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly closer to the upper side of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are inserted into the cover body support cylinder 575 to insert the cover body 1300 into the main body. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by being pivotally supported by the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engaging piece 1302 is locked in the cover body engaging groove 785. The back surface of various components including the main control board box 624 can be protected. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. Since the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 624 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 is connected to a test terminal for testing. The contact operation opening 1303 is provided at a position corresponding to 624b and 624c, and the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape at the upper part of the lower contact side wall 1306 of the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 1304 and an abutting protrusion 1305 that project against the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state project from the inside of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 is formed to be relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the contact protrusion 1305 is provided to be relatively low along the one side opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent unauthorized actions on the main control board box 624 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 1303.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact. Therefore, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached, as shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 1181a is formed which is formed to be lower than the surface. Accordingly, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box attachment region of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the attachment region 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened near the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is passed through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 in the lock hole 1308. The cylinder lock 1309 has a lock shaft 1311 projecting from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is a screw that is drilled in a lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by passing through the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting and rotating a key (owned by a manager in charge of the game hall) into the cylinder lock 1309. Yes. In addition, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided on the lower portion of the lock hole 1308 so as to project inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 1300 and above and below the engagement piece 1302.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the above-described screw stop hole 1307, lock piece 1313, and guide protrusion 1316. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As described above, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of 567 (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770 sandwiched). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at a lower portion of the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569. A locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the upper and lower sides. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 passes therethrough, and the reinforcing wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b and the lock piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 569a. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and turning it, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 569. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screw holes that match in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) in 1307 and the retaining holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. It is easy to grasp, so it is easy to load and stack, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, it protrudes from the back of the opponent's pachinko machine on the back of the pachinko machine 1 lined up It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring to be performed. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment has the same effect as shown in FIG.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 1300. It was configured to hold. As the second reason, as described above, since the lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 1105, the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 cannot be particularly opened. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above. The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 1306 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only an illegal act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 but also an illegal action on the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs out of control and recovers. Further, a standing wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the back of the pachinko machine 1 that is lined up backwards, It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the top.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally right front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally left front, and FIG. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left rear, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a frame-shaped front component 601 that defines an outer periphery of a game area 605 into which a game ball is driven. A gaming panel 600 arranged to close the gaming area 605 on the rear side of the front component 601 and a function arranged on the outside of the gaming area 605 on the lower side of the front component 601 on the right side of the out port 606. The display unit 640, the start port unit 2000 that is arranged at the upper center of the out port 606 at the substantially horizontal center in the game area 605 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and the outer periphery of the game area 605 on the left side of the start port unit 2000 And a left side prize port member 2100 supported by the front surface of the game panel 600 and a game area 6 on the right side of the start port unit 2000. 5, a right side winning opening member 2150 disposed along the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and a left side guiding member 2180 disposed on the right side of the left side winning prize opening member 2100 and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 600. And a gate member 2200 which is arranged on the right side slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction in the game area 605 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and a frame which is arranged in a substantially central part of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the game panel 600 and the center accessory 2300. A liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image and notification information. That. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 600 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Starting port unit]
First, the start port unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166.
FIG. 157 is a perspective view in which each device mounted on the game panel is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the start-up unit viewed from the oblique front. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the starting port unit viewed from the oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the front side decoration unit of the start port unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 162A is a perspective view of the start unit of the reel unit viewed from the diagonal front; FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the reel unit as viewed obliquely from behind, FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the reel unit as viewed from obliquely forward, and FIG. 164 is a view when the reel unit is cut at the center in the vertical direction. In the perspective view of the lower part of the Ri, Figure 165 is a longitudinal sectional view of the reel unit, Figure 166 is a developed view of a reel seat in the reel unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the start-up unit 2000 of the present example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600 e formed at the lower portion in the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 600, and then the gaming panel 600 It is fixed to the front of the. The start port unit 2000 includes a plurality of receiving ports (winning ports) through which game balls driven into the game area 605 can be received, and a rotation effect device 2003 having a reel unit 2040 that displays symbols by rotating and stopping. And. As the plurality of receiving ports, a first start port 2001 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a second start port 2002 disposed obliquely lower right of the first start port 2001, and a first start port 2001 are provided. And a general winning opening 2004 arranged diagonally to the lower left.

  The configuration of the start port unit 2000 is described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, the start port unit 2000 includes a frame-like base unit 2020 having a first start port 2001 and a general winning port 2004, and a front side of the base unit 2020 that protrudes into the game area 605. The front decoration unit 2090 to be arranged, the second start port 2002 fitted in the right hole 2021b in the base unit 2020, and the reel unit 2040 arranged in the central opening 2021a of the base unit 2020 are mainly used. It is prepared for.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, the base unit 2020 has a substantially square opening 2021a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center, and is arranged at the center in the left-right direction above the opening 2021a. A start plate 2001 and a base plate 2021 integrally formed with a general winning port 2004 arranged on the left side of the opening 2021a are provided. Here, the first start port 2001 and the general winning port 2004 protrude into the game area 605 and the upper side is opened, so that a game ball rolling in the game area 605 can always be received (win). The front face of the general winning opening 2004 is closed by a winning opening decoration 2024. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the first start port 2001, there are a pair of logo lenses 2022 that have windows on the front surface, and that are shaped like letters, and a pair of light emitting substrates 2023 that project light onto the logo lenses 2022. A decorative character accommodating portion 2021e accommodated from the rear side is integrally formed. A plurality of sealing members 2025 having a decorative pattern are attached to the front surface of the base plate 2021. In addition, a pair of rock-shaped lenses 2027 (see FIG. 159) having a rock pattern are fitted from the front side into the small openings 2021c and 2021d formed on the left and right sides of the opening 2021a, and the base plate 2021. Light is projected by a light emitting substrate 2028 arranged on the rear side so as to be decorated.

  As shown in FIGS. 159 and 161, the front decoration unit 2090 is attached to a frame-shaped frame member 2091 having a rolling surface 2091a of a game ball on the upper surface, and the front surface (excluding the lower portion) of the frame member 2091. A gate-shaped front ornament 2092, a rope-shaped ornament 2093 and a pair of rope-holding portions 2094 disposed below the portal-shaped front ornament 2092. By the combination, a window portion 2090a is formed so that a symbol (details will be described later) displayed on the reel unit 2040 is visible from the player side. The gate-shaped front ornament 2092 includes a character lens 2095 at the upper center rear side thereof, and light is emitted from the light emitting substrate 2098 through the ornamental lens 2097 provided in the frame member 2091. Yes. Further, on the rear side of the rope shape ornament 2093 and the rope hold portion 2094, a light emitting substrate 2096 that projects light toward them to decorate the light emission is disposed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 159, a through hole 2021b penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided on the right side of the small opening 2021d in the base plate 2021, and a second start port 2002 is provided in the through hole 2021b. It is inserted. The second starter port 2002 has an open / close drive unit 2034 having a ball entrance part 2031 whose upper side is opened, a pair of movable pieces 2032 supported so as to be expandable, and a starter solenoid 2033 for moving the pair of movable pieces 2032. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2032 rises substantially vertically, an obstruction nail (not shown) planted on the upper side of the second start port 2002 and the pair of movable pieces 2032 With this, the game ball cannot be received at the second start port 2002, whereas the game ball is received at the second start port 2002 when the pair of movable pieces 2032 are expanded in the left-right direction (the state shown in FIG. 158). It has become possible. That is, the second start port 2002 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2032. The pair of movable pieces 2032 are opened and closed based on detection of the passage of a game ball by a gate sensor 2202 of a gate member 2200 described later.

  On the other hand, the symbol of the reel unit 2040 is displayed through the window 2090a of the front decoration unit 2090, and the effect of the game or lottery is enhanced by making the symbol change and the stop symbol visible. Note that the vertical size of the window 2090a is substantially equal to the diameter of a reel main body 2041, which will be described later, so that even if the diameter of the reel main body 2041 is relatively small, the window 2090a can be visually recognized through the window 2090a. Each design can be shown relatively large.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 to 164, the reel unit 2040 is made up of a drum-shaped (cylindrical) reel body 2041 made of a transparent member and having one end side (left side in this example) opened, and the reel body 2041 opened. The reel cover 2042 is detachably attached to the end side, and includes a reel body 2041 and a right reel support part 2044 and a left reel support part 2045 that rotatably support the reel cover 2042. An annular reel fixing portion 2046 is provided inside the left reel supporting portion 2045 and is supported via the reel fixing portion 2046. Further, as a drive mechanism for applying a rotational force to the reel body 2041, a drive motor 2048 attached to the right reel support portion 2044, a motor gear 2049 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 2048, and a right side surface of the reel body 2041. And a reel gear 2050 that is fixed and meshed with the motor gear 2049.

  A reel shaft plate 2066 serving as a rotation shaft of the reel body 2041 is disposed inside the reel body 2041. More specifically, through-holes 2041a and 2050a communicating with each other are provided at the rotation center of the right side surface of the reel main body 2041 and the rotation center of the reel gear 2050, and a reel bearing 2068a is provided to the through-holes 2041a and 2050a. Inserted in a rotatable state. Further, through holes 2042a and 2046a communicating with each other are provided at the rotation center of the reel lid 2042 and the rotation center of the reel fixing portion 2046, and the reel bearing 2068b can rotate with respect to these through holes 2042a and 2046a. Inserted in a state. On the other hand, the reel shaft plate 2066 includes a right reel shaft 2067a extending in the right axis direction and a left reel shaft 2067b extending in the left axis direction. The right reel shaft 2067a includes a reel bearing 2068a. It is inserted (that is, through the through holes 2041a and 2050a), and its tip is fitted into a fitting portion 2044a formed on the right reel support portion 2044. An engagement portion (not shown) that prevents the reel bearing 2068a from rotating with respect to the right reel shaft 2067a is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the reel bearing 2068a. Further, the left reel shaft 2067b is inserted through the reel bearing 2068b (ie, through the through holes 2042a and 2046a), and the tip thereof is fitted into a fitting portion 2045a formed in the left reel support portion 2045. Yes. An engagement portion (not shown) that prevents the reel bearing 2068b from rotating with respect to the left reel shaft 2067b is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the reel bearing 2068b. That is, the reel main body 2041, the reel lid 2042, and the reel gear 2050 are rotatably supported with respect to the reel bearings 2068a and 2068b supported by the reel shafts 2067a and 2067b. In other words, the outer reel body 2041 can be rotated without rotating the reel shaft 2066 disposed inside the reel body 2041.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 163 and 165, a reel sheet 2060 disposed along the outer peripheral surface of the reel body 2041 is provided inside the reel body 2041, and the reel sheet is passed through the transparent reel body 2041. The symbol displayed on 2060 can be visually recognized. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the reel sheet 2060 has a plurality (three in this example) of symbol display areas (that is, first symbol display areas) partitioned in the circumferential direction of the reel body 2041. 2061, a second symbol display area 2062, a third symbol display area 2063), and when the rotation of the reel body 2041 is stopped, a first symbol display area 2061, a second symbol display area 2062, and a third symbol display area 2062 are provided. Only the symbol display area selected based on the lottery result or the like from the symbol display area 2063 is configured to be visible from the player side through the window portion 2090a of the front decoration unit 2090.

  By the way, when the symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 2061, 2062, and 2063 of the reel sheet 2060 are uniform, the same symbols repeatedly appear in the same arrangement every time the reel body 2041 rotates. Therefore, the effect produced by the rotation effect device 2003 is likely to be monotonous, and there is a risk that the effect of the effect will be reduced while the reel body 2041 is changing (during rotation).

  On the other hand, in this example, at least one region (specifically, the third symbol display region 2063) of the plurality of symbol display regions 2061, 2062, and 2063 is set as a variable symbol region, and the variable symbol region includes two symbols. A symbol display means 2064 for selectively displaying a symbol of a type is provided. More specifically, the symbol display means 2064 includes a light emitting substrate 2069 that is disposed inside the reel body 2041 and projects light to the player side through the third symbol display area 2063 of the reel sheet 2060. In particular, the light emitting substrate 2069 includes a full-color LED capable of projecting light of a plurality of kinds of colors including at least one of the three primary colors, blue, and another one of the three primary colors, red. The light emitting substrate 2069 is attached to a flat plate portion 2066c (see FIG. 163) of the reel shaft plate 2066 provided in a fixed state in the reel body 2041, and is always forward (regardless of the rotation state of the reel body 2041). It is possible to project light toward the player side. In addition, the reel shaft plate 2066 is provided with a reflector 2070 that guides light projected from the light emitting substrate 2069 toward the front, so that only the portion corresponding to the window portion 2090a of the front decoration unit 2090 is efficiently illuminated. It is possible. Further, an electric wire (not shown) connected to the light emitting substrate 2069 is wired through the inside of the left reel shaft 2067b, and an outlet 2067c formed at the end of the left reel shaft 2067b (see FIG. 162 (b)). To the outside of the reel unit 2040. That is, the electric wires are wired without being twisted even if the reel body 2041 rotates.

  Further, the symbol display means 2064 includes a third symbol display area 2063 of the reel sheet 2060, which includes a first transmission means 2064a and a second transmission means 2064b. The first transmission means 2064a displays the first symbol (for example, the letter “BIG”) by allowing only the first color (specifically, red) light projected from the light emitting substrate 2069 to pass therethrough. On the other hand, the second transmission means 2064b allows only the second color (specifically, blue) light projected from the light emitting substrate 2069 to pass through the second pattern (for example, the letter “REG”). To display. The first transmission means 2064a and the second transmission means 2064b can be realized by color filters.

  As described above, since the symbol display means 2064 is provided, the symbol row of the entire reel sheet 2060 can be sharpened by changing the symbol of the third symbol display area 2063 as necessary. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the effect and enhance the interest of the effect by the rotation effect device 2003. In particular, since the symbol displayed in the third symbol display area 2063 can be changed only by changing the color of the light projected from the light emitting substrate 2069, it can be configured extremely simply. Further, the symbol display means 2064 is constituted by a first transmissive means 2064a and a second transmissive means 2064b constituted by color filters, and a light emitting substrate 2069. Therefore, the symbol display means 2064 is constituted by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device 1400. Compared to the case, the overall size of the symbol display means 2064 can be reduced, and as a result, the symbol display means 2064 can be assembled satisfactorily even if the size of the reel body 2041 is relatively small.

  In addition, since “red” and “blue”, which are the three primary colors of light, are employed as the first color and the second color, the first symbol is displayed in red and the second symbol is displayed in blue. For this reason, both symbols are displayed in a single color, and the form of each symbol can be easily grasped intuitively.

  By the way, as the arrangement method of the first transmission means 2064a and the second transmission means 2064b, two members (the first member having the first transmission means 2064a and the second transmission means 2064b are formed on separate surfaces. A method of superposing and arranging the second member provided) is conceivable. However, according to this method, since the thickness of two members is superimposed, the thickness of the entire reel sheet 2060 is increased, and the mounting is free. The problem is that the degree is limited. In addition, the amount of light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2069 is attenuated, and the display tends to be relatively dark. In order to avoid this problem, it is conceivable to increase the amount of light from the light emitting substrate 2069. However, in this case, the power consumption of the light emitting substrate 2069 increases and the amount of heat generated increases, which is preferable. is not.

  In contrast, in this example, two transmission means (first transmission means 2064a and second transmission means 2064b) are arranged side by side (partially overlapping) on the same surface, that is, on one member. As a result, the thickness of the reel sheet 2060 can be reduced and made compact compared to the case where two members are overlapped, and the degree of freedom in mounting can be improved. In addition, since the two transmission means 2064a and 2064b are formed on the same surface, a decrease in transmittance can be reduced and a clear display can be performed. Further, since the transmittance is increased, an increase in the amount of light from the light-emitting substrate 2069 (that is, an increase in power consumption of the light-emitting substrate 2069) can be suppressed, and the heat generation amount of the light-emitting substrate 2069 can be reduced. The first transmitting means 2064a and the second transmitting means 2064b are formed on the same surface by, for example, one of resin injection molding techniques in which two transmitting means 2064a and 2064b are bonded together. Examples of the method include applying a multicolor molding technique and applying a color printing technique.

  By the way, when the 1st permeation | transmission means 2064a and the 2nd permeation | transmission means 2064b are overlapped and arrange | positioned, the duplication part 2064c does not permeate | transmit both 1st color (red) and 2nd color (blue). Can be considered. This is because when the first color (red) is projected from the light emitting substrate 2069, the first color (red) is blocked by the second transmission means 2064b, while when the second color (blue) is projected, the first transmission is performed. This is because the second color (blue) is blocked by the means 2064a. As a result, there is a problem that the color of the overlapping portion 2064c is missing and is not normally displayed in either one (or both) of the first symbol or the second symbol.

  On the other hand, in this example, the overlapping part 2064c of the first transmission means 2064a and the second transmission means 2064b is configured to transmit each light. Accordingly, the color of the overlapping portion 2064c is not lost, and each symbol can be displayed in a desired color and form, and as a result, the first symbol and the second symbol can be easily distinguished.

  The first symbol display area 2061 and the second symbol display area 2062 in the reel sheet 2060 are made of a material that does not transmit light of any color including the first color (red) and the second color (blue). . For this reason, even if light of the first color or the second color is projected from the light emitting board 2069 disposed inside the reel body 2041, light is not emitted from the symbol display area other than the variable symbol area. Thus, it is possible to distinguish the variable symbol area from other areas depending on the presence or absence of light emission. As shown in FIG. 162, a light shielding sheet 2071 is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel gear 2050, and even if light leaks from the right side surface of the reel body 2041, the reel body 2041 is provided. It is possible to show only shining.

  By the way, if each symbol display area of the reel sheet 2060 is classified according to the type of symbols to be displayed, a reference symbol area consisting only of the first symbol display area 2061, a second symbol display area 2062, and a third symbol display area 2063 are obtained. It can be divided roughly into the effect design area to include. In the reference symbol area (first symbol display area 2061), a reference symbol (specifically, a character “GG”) is displayed, and all the symbols are displayed by repeatedly recognizing the reference symbol while the reel body 2041 is rotating. It is possible to easily recognize the number of symbol display areas 2061, 2062, and 2063 and the relative positions of the respective effect symbol areas (second symbol display area 2062 and third symbol display area 2063). Further, if the reference symbol is made to stand still before the reel main body 2041 starts to rotate, it can be grasped that it is on standby. On the other hand, in the effect symbol area (the second symbol display area 2062 and the third symbol display area 2063), the effect symbol is displayed, and depending on which effect symbol is stopped (that is, which of the reel main body 2041 is stopped) Whether or not the production symbol is visible through the window 2090a) makes it possible to grasp the level of advantage.

  Further, as described above, since the third symbol display area 2063, which is one of the effect symbol areas, is a variable symbol area, the effect symbol string pattern is increased and the expectation level in the effect symbol string is high. Can give an intonation. In addition, since the second symbol display area 2062 is an invariant symbol area in which the symbol does not change, the player focuses on the variable symbol area (third symbol display area 2063) while the reel body 2041 is changing. It becomes possible to recognize the change of the effect design relatively easily. In particular, in the third symbol display area 2063, one of an expected large symbol (BIG) and an expected small symbol (REG) having different expectations for the gaming state is alternatively displayed, and in the second symbol display region 2062, An effect design (BIG) having the same expectation as the expected large design is displayed. Therefore, when the expected small symbol (REG) is displayed in the third symbol display area 2063, when the reel main body 2041 is stopped, the game state is divided into a state with high expectation and a state with low expectation. The operation can be noted until the reel body 2041 stops. On the other hand, when the expected large symbol (BIG) is displayed in the third symbol display area 2063, all of the effect symbol areas become the expected large symbol (BIG), and until the reel main body 2041 waits to stop. Therefore, it can be grasped that the state of high expectation is high, and as a result, it is possible to give a great joy to the player.

  Further, the rotational position of the reel main body 2041 is detected by the photo sensor 2051 (see FIG. 163), and the symbol switching in the third symbol display area 2063 (that is, the change in the color of light projected from the light emitting substrate 2069) is performed. The third symbol display area 2063 is set to be invisible from the player side. For this reason, it is possible to generate a sense that the design is suddenly changed, and the player can be surprised by the change.

  As shown in FIG. 159, the reel unit 2040 is covered by a back cover 2080 attached to the back side of the base plate 2021, and is driven via a relay board 2081 disposed on the back side of the back cover 2080. A driving signal is sent to the motor 2048.

[2-2. Left side prize opening member]
With reference to FIGS. 157, 167, and 168, the left side winning prize opening member 2100 will be described. FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the left side winning port member as viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the left side winning port member as viewed from diagonally forward. As shown in FIG. 157, the left side prize port member 2100 is an opening portion 600e formed on the left side of the opening portion 600e into which the start port unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at a lower portion of the game panel 600 that is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the left side prize-winning member 2100 has a left side base plate 2101 in which the left side surface is formed in an arc shape and two general prize-winning holes 2102 are formed on the lower right side. And a light emitting decoration unit 2105 that is attached to the upper front surface of the left side base plate 2101 and is disposed so as to protrude into the game area 605.

  The general winning opening 2102 protrudes into the game area 605 and is open on the upper side, so that a game ball rolling in the game area 605 can always be received (win). In addition, on the front face of the general winning opening 2102, a winning opening decoration 2104 to which a seal member 2103 is attached is provided. On the other hand, the light emitting decoration unit 2105 has a display decoration part 2106 having a rolling surface 2106a for guiding a game ball rolling in the game area 605 toward the center of the game area 605, and a front face on the upper side of the display decoration part 2106. An attached annular front lens 2107 and a rear lens 2109 and a character lens 2110 disposed on the rear side of the display decoration portion 2106 so as to correspond to the front lens 2107 are provided. In addition, a plurality of holes 2106b are formed in the lower portion of the display decoration portion 2106, and the LEDs 2111a mounted on the special symbol display substrate 2111 are inserted into the holes 2106b. A transparent sheet member 2108 that closes the hole 2106b from the front is provided on the lower front surface of the display decorative portion 2106, and the special symbol display substrate 2111 is supported by the substrate cover 2112.

  In addition, a rear base plate lens 2114 is provided on the lower rear side of the left side base plate 2101, and a rear base plate lens 2114 and a rear side of the entire left side base plate 2101 including the rear base plate lens 2114 are provided. A light emitting substrate 2115 that projects light toward the character lens 2110 is provided in a state of being accommodated in the substrate cover 2116. An opening 2101a is formed in the upper part of the left side base plate 2101 so that the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2115 is applied to the back surface of the character lens 2110 through the opening 2101a. .

[2-3. Right side prize opening member]
The right side winning opening member 2150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157, 169, and 170. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the right side winning opening member viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the right side winning opening member viewed from an oblique front. As shown in FIG. 157, the right-side prize port member 2150 is an opening 600e formed on the right side of the opening 600e into which the start port unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower part of the game panel 600 that is located to the right of the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the right side winning opening member 2150 has a right side base plate 2151 in which the right side surface is formed in an arc shape and one general winning opening 2155 is provided on the lower left side. A plurality of decorative bodies (a right decoration lens 2152, a right decoration 2153, and a right rock lens 2154) disposed on the lower front surface of the side base plate 2151 (on the right side of the right side prize winning opening 2155) and projecting to the game area 605, and the right A light emitting substrate 2156 that is disposed on the rear side of the side base plate 2151 and projects light toward the right side base plate 2151 side, and is attached to the right side base plate 2151 from the rear side of the light emitting substrate 2156 and covers the light emitting substrate 2156. A substrate cover 2157, and a clamp 2158 for holding an electric wire (not shown) attached to the back surface of the substrate cover 2157 and connected to the light emitting substrate 2156. It is configured Te. The general winning opening 2155 protrudes into the game area 605 and is open on the upper side, so that game balls rolling in the game area 605 can always be received (win). Further, on the upper surface of the right decoration 2153, a rolling surface 2153a for guiding a game ball rolling in the game area 605 toward the center of the game area 605 is provided.

[2-4. Left side guide member]
The left side guide member 2180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 171. FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the left side guide member as viewed obliquely from the front. As shown in FIG. 157, the left side guide member 2180 is an opening formed on the right side of the opening 600e into which the left side prize port member 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower portion of the game panel 600 that is located to the right from the center in the left-right direction. After being inserted from the front side with respect to 600e, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in FIG. 171, the left side guide member 2180 has a base plate 2181, a lens unit 2182 disposed on the front surface thereof, and light emission that projects light toward the lens unit 2182 to decorate the lens unit 2182. A substrate (not shown) and a substrate cover 2183 that covers the light emitting substrate from the rear side are provided. Further, the lens portion 2182 protrudes into the game area 605, and a rolling surface 2182a formed in a downward slope toward the right side is formed on the upper surface thereof, and rolls in the left game area 605 (see FIG. 151). The game ball to be guided is guided toward the center of the game area 605.

[2-5. Gate member]
As shown in FIG. 157, the gate member 2200 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed on the right side of the gaming panel 600 on the right side of the horizontal center and slightly above the vertical center. The game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. This gate member 2200 has a gate with a width that allows only one game ball to pass through. The gate sensor 2202 (see FIG. 204) arranged in the gate 2201 detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201. Can be done.

[2-6. Center character]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157 and 172 to 177. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main component member as viewed from the oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the center portion decorative portion as seen from the diagonal front, FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the center base plate of the center bonus as seen from the diagonal front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the unit from diagonally forward, and FIG. 177 is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the big winning opening unit and was seen from diagonally forward.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The gate member 2200 described above is disposed between the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2300 and the outer periphery of the game area 605.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the center accessory 2300 includes a frame-shaped center base plate 2301, a decorative portion 2303 attached to the front side of the center base plate 2301, and a lower right side of the center base plate 2301. And a special prize opening unit 2330 attached to the pedestal portion 2301b (see FIG. 175).

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 175, the center base plate 2301 has a substantially annular shape having an opening window 2300a. The center base plate 2301 passes through a warp passage, which will be described later, on the inside of the center base plate 2301. A front slope portion 2302 is provided that can roll the game ball that has entered into the left and right direction. Further, at the lower part of the center base plate 2301, a chance exit for releasing a game ball that has entered a chance opening 3302g formed in a shelf unit 3300 (see FIG. 196), which will be described later, to a game area 605 below the center accessory 2300. 2301a is provided penetrating in the front-rear direction. In addition, a pedestal portion 2301b for mounting the special prize opening unit 2330 is provided on the lower right side of the center base plate 2301 so as to protrude obliquely downward to the right.

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the decorative portion 2303 is composed of a plurality of members disposed along a frame-shaped center base plate 2301. Specifically, a lower front ornament 2304 arranged from the lower part to the left side, a plurality of rock ornaments 2305 arranged from the left part to the upper part and displaying a rock pattern, and a plurality of pieces arranged with predetermined characters displayed on the upper right part Logo decoration 2306, a right decoration 2307 arranged on the right side, and a wrist cover 2309 arranged below the logo decoration 2306 and covering the right movable decoration 3101 of the right accessory device 3100 described later. The lower front decoration 2304 has an opening 2304a so as not to close the chance outlet 2301a formed in the center base plate 2301. In addition, a warp entrance 2323 that opens toward the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 is provided between the lower front decoration 2304 and the rock decoration 2305, so that the game rolls in the game area 605. It is possible to cause the ball to enter the center object 2300.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 173, a plurality of light emitting substrates 2312 are disposed between the decorative portion 2303 and the center base plate 2301, and light is projected toward each decorative portion 2303. This makes it possible to decorate the light. On the rear side of the wrist cover 2309, an uneven wrist lens 2313 that partially protrudes forward through a window formed in the wrist cover 2309 is also disposed, and light is transmitted to the player side through the wrist lens 2313. Is supposed to be emitted. Further, a lens 2314 is disposed on the rear side of the logo decoration 2306, and light projected from the light emitting substrate 2323 supported by the shoulder base 2326 behind the center base plate 2301 passes through the lens 2314 to the logo decoration 2306. Irradiated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the special winning opening unit 2330 is a unit that forms an openable / closable special winning opening 2330a and a second out opening 2330b. The big prize opening unit 2330 is attached to the front of the big prize opening base 2331, the out path 2332 having a second out opening 2330b disposed on the front surface of the big winning opening base 2331 and opened to the right side. And a big prize opening passage 2333 having a big prize opening 2330a opened to the right. The out passage 2332 guides the game ball that has entered the second out port 2330b obliquely to the left and downward, and through the opening (not shown) formed in the grand prize port base 2331 to the rear side of the grand prize port base 2331. It can be sent to the out path 2344a of the disposed passage member 2344. The grand prize opening passage 2333 guides the game ball won in the big prize opening 2330a to the left side, and sends it to the winning path 2344b of the passage member 2344 through the opening 2331a formed in the big prize opening base 2331. Is possible. Note that the game ball won in the special winning opening 2330a is detected by the count sensor 2013. Further, the front side of the passage member 2344 is closed by a passage cover 2339 so that the game ball does not deviate from the respective routes 2344a and 2344b.

  The special winning opening 2330a can be opened and closed by a blade 2338. The blade 2338 is supported so as to be rotatable about a lower shaft, and in a substantially vertical state (the state shown in FIG. 176), the special winning opening 2330a is closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball. When it is rotated so that it tilts to the right with the front-rear direction as the axial direction (that is, it rotates in the clockwise direction), the special winning opening 2330a is opened and a game ball can be received. In the normal gaming state, the blade 2338 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2330a is closed, and a lottery is received when a game ball is received (starts winning) in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002. According to the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”), the special winning opening solenoid 2347 is driven to open and close. The driving mechanism will be described in detail. The big prize opening solenoid 2347 is arranged with a plunger (not shown) facing downward, and a crank 2348a is connected to the plunger via an arm 2348, and the crank 2348a. And the blade 2338 are connected by a shaft pin 2350. That is, when the plunger protrudes downward, the linear motion of the plunger is converted into a rotational motion by the arm 2348 and the crank 2348a, and the shaft pin 2350 and the blade 2338 are rotated in the clockwise direction. The special winning opening solenoid 2347 is supported by being sandwiched between the solenoid mounting base 2345 and the solenoid metal plate 2346, and is covered with a cover 2351 disposed on the lower side thereof.

  Further, a front decoration portion 2334 including a flame-shaped ornament 2335, a rock-shaped ornament 2336, and the like is disposed on the front side of the prize winning opening base 2331, and the front decoration portion 2334 is disposed on the rear side thereof. 2337 is decorated with light emission. Further, a light emitting board 2343 attached via a board cover 2342 and a light emitting board 2341 directly attached to the big prize opening base 2331 are disposed on the rear side of the big prize opening base 2331. By the substrates 2343 and 2341, a part of the big prize opening base 2331 (part that can be seen from the player side) and the vicinity of the big prize opening 2330a can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 173, on the rear side of the center base plate 2301, there is a warp passage 2316 for guiding a ball entered from the warp inlet 2310 to the upper rolling surface 3302a of the shelf unit 3300 (see FIG. 196). A substrate cover 2318 that covers a harness (not shown) connected to the light emitting substrate 2312 from the rear side, a shoulder cover 2320 that covers the right shoulder portion of the center base plate 2301 from the rear side, and a wrist base 2321 that supports the wrist lens 2313 And a light emitting substrate 2324 horizontally disposed so as to project light onto the rock decoration 2305 from the upper side of the center base plate 2301 and a substrate cover 2325 covering the light emitting substrate 2324 from the rear side.

  Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 179 is a front view showing the relationship between each accessory device and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and FIG. 180 is an upper accessory device. FIG. 181 is a perspective view in which the upper accessory device is disassembled into main components and viewed from the oblique front, and FIG. 182 is an upper view of the upper accessory device. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the movable decorative body as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the upper movable decorative body that is disassembled into main components and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. FIG. 184 (b) is an enlarged perspective view of a drive unit in the upper movable decorative body, and FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the left movable portion when the upper movable decorative body is cut at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. 186 is a right side view showing the operation of the head guard in the upper movable decorative body, and FIG. The elevation drive unit of the character object device is a perspective view seen obliquely from the front by decomposing each main components, 187 is a perspective view of a material obtained by decomposing later obliquely.

  Further, FIG. 188 (a) is a perspective view of the right hand accessory device seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 188 (b) is a perspective view of the state where the right movable decorative body has moved to the effect position, seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 189 is a perspective view of the right accessory device disassembled for each main constituent member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the disassembled device viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the right hand accessory device as seen from the diagonally front side exploded, and FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the right hand tool device as seen from the diagonal front side after being disassembled. FIG. 193 is a schematic explanatory view showing the operation of the right movable decorative body. Further, FIG. 194 (a) is a perspective view of the left side accessory device as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 194 (b) is a perspective view of the state where the left movable decorative body is moved to the effect position as viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the left-side accessory device disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the shelf unit as viewed from diagonally forward, FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the shelf unit as seen from the diagonally front side after disassembling the main components, and FIG. FIG. 199 is a perspective view of a left side portion when the shelf unit is cut in a vertical direction at a portion where a movable shelf is provided, and FIG. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the movable shelf and its mechanism portion from an oblique front. FIG. FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal display device as viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the back box, the liquid crystal display device, and the liquid crystal edge decoration as viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 203 is an exploded perspective view of the back box and the passage cover as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 203 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate and the like disposed on the back side of the back box and viewed from the oblique rear. .

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 178, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, in the back box 3001, an upper accessory device 3010 disposed on the front upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a right accessory device 3100 disposed on the front right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a liquid crystal display device 1400, and a left accessory device 3200 disposed on the front left side of 1400.

  As shown in FIG. 202, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a projecting outward at the front end. The game panel 600 (see FIG. 155) is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side can be seen through the opening 3001c. . Further, the back box 3001 is formed with appropriate attachment portions for attaching and fixing the upper accessory device 3010, the right accessory device 3100, the left accessory device 3200, and the like.

  The upper accessory device 3010 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the upper movable decorative body 3011 and the upper movable decorative body 3011 that are shaped to imitate the “face” of a predetermined character are placed in a standby position on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (FIG. 179 (a)) and an elevating drive unit 3040 that moves up and down between an effect position (see FIG. 179 (b)) that is in front of the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400. On both the left and right sides of the upper movable decorative body 3011, a left face side decoration 3052 and a right face side decoration 3053 shaped like a character's “shoulder” are fixedly attached to the front surface of the elevating drive unit 3040. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 182 to 184, the upper movable decorative body 3011 includes a face body base 3012 having a substantially U-shaped right side surface, a head guard 3013 disposed on the upper front side of the face body base 3012, and a face body. And a lower mask 3014 disposed on the lower front side of the base 3012. The head guard 3013 has a lid shape so as to cover the “frontal head” of the character, and has a shape in which the rear half of the upper surface and the rear surface are cut out, and a pair of shaft holes 3013a formed in the lower portions of the left and right side surfaces. Is communicated with a pair of mounting holes 3012a formed in the side surface portion of the face body base 3012, and can be rotated by a head shaft pin 3025 inserted into the shaft hole 3013a and the mounting hole 3012a (ie, two in FIG. 185). As shown by the dotted line). A bush 3026 and a pin stopper 3027 are provided at both ends of the head axis pin 3025, and the head guard 3013 is supported against the face body base 3012 so as not to rattle in the left-right direction.

  A drive unit 3019 is provided as a mechanism for driving the head guard 3013. As shown in FIG. 184 (b), the drive unit 3019 includes a motor 3021 fixed to the motor base 3020, a motor cam 3022 connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 3021, and a drive arm that connects the motor cam 3022 and the head guard 3013. 3023. The drive arm 3023 includes a horizontal portion 3023a that is horizontal in the left-right direction, a hanging piece 3023b that hangs from the right end thereof, and a standing piece 3023c that is erected vertically from the left end of the horizontal portion 3023a. The hanging piece 3023b includes a motor cam. A vertically long slit 3023d into which the protrusion 3022a of 3022 is inserted is formed, and a shaft portion 3023e that protrudes rightward and is inserted into guide grooves 3013b formed on the left and right sides of the head guard 3013 on the upper portion of the standing piece 3023c. Is formed. Further, the drive arm 3023 is supported so that the boundary portion between the horizontal portion 3023 a and the standing piece 3023 c can rotate with respect to the motor base 3020. As a result, when the motor 3021 operates and the motor cam 3022 connected to the motor 3021 rotates by a predetermined angle, the drive arm 3023 rotates, and the shaft portion 3023e of the drive arm 3023 is displaced obliquely downward on the rear side. 3013 can be rotated about the head pin 3025 and moved to a position indicated by a two-dot chain line. The rotational position of the head guard 3013 can be recognized by detecting a detection piece 3023f formed on the drive arm 3023 by a photo sensor 3028.

  On the other hand, the lower mask 3014 has a mask shape so as to cover the “mouth” of the character, and a pair of shaft holes 3014 a formed at the upper portions of the left and right side surfaces are formed in the side surface portion of the face body base 3012. The pair of mounting holes 3012b communicate with each other and are rotatably supported by a shaft pin 3029 inserted through the shaft hole 3014a and the mounting hole 3012b. The lower mask 3014 does not have a configuration corresponding to the drive unit 3019 of the head guard 3013, and is supported in a state of being biased upward by the tension spring 3018 (the state shown in FIG. 182). That is, the lower mask 3014 cannot be mechanically driven, but can be swung by inertial force or vibration applied to the lower mask 3014 while the upper movable decorative body 3011 is moving.

  Further, the head guard 3013 and the lower mask 3014 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and on the rear side thereof, a large red pat lens 3016 having light transmittance and a lower front surface of the pat lens 3016 are disposed. A horizontally long upper mask 3015 is provided, and the patrol lens 3016 and the upper mask 3015 can be visually recognized from between the head guard 3013 and the lower mask 3014. In particular, the upper mask 3015 protrudes upward in the center in the left-right direction, and when the head guard 3013 and the upper mask 3015 are in the normal position (that is, the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 182), the upper mask 3015 (particularly the protrusion 3015a). ) Becomes the “nose” of the character, and the pat lens 3016 can appear to be the “eyes” of the character. The patrol lens 3016 is formed in an arc shape in the vertical direction of the surface, and a light emitting substrate 3017 for projecting light to the patrol lens 3016 is disposed on the rear side of the patrol lens 3016, and the entire patrol lens 3016 emits light. It can be decorated.

  A pair of side covers 3032 shaped to imitate the character's “ears” are fixed to the attachment portion 3012 c on the left and right sides of the face body base 3012. Since these side covers 3032 are attached so as to sandwich the face guide base 3031 and the lower mask 3014, end portions of the head pin 3025, the shaft pin 3029, and the like that pivotally support the head guard 3013 and the lower mask 3014. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated due to these exposures. Further, a face guide base 3031 is disposed on the rear side of the face main body base 3012, and is connected to the lift drive unit 3040 via the face guide base 3031.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the lifting drive unit 3040 for moving the upper movable decorative body 3011 in the vertical direction is disposed on the rear face of the face slide cover 3041 and the face slide cover 3041 that are open on the rear surface. A box-shaped face slide base 3042 having an open front surface, a motor 3045 attached to the back surface of the face slide base 3042 via a heat radiating plate 3046, and housed in the face slide base 3042, and rotating the motor 3045 up and down And a transmission mechanism that converts the linear motion in the direction to the face guide base 3031 of the upper movable decorative body 3011. The transmission mechanism is supported by the motor gear 3047 connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3045, the face slide cover 3041 and the face slide base 3042, and the slide relay gear 3048 meshed with the motor gear 3047, and the face slide base 3042. The slide member 3043 is supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a rack 3043a is formed on the left side. The rack 3043a is formed in the vertical direction and meshed with the slide relay gear 3048. When the slide relay gear 3048 rotates, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the rack 3043a, and the slide member 3043 moves in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be. The slide member 3043 is formed with a fitting hole 3043b, and a plurality of protrusions 3031a protruding from the back surface of the face guide base 3031 are inserted from the front side. The protrusion 3031a is fitted into the fitting hole 3043b through the bush 3044 and the vertically long slit 3041a formed in the face slide cover 3041.

  Further, in the face slide base 3042, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is placed in the standby position (upper side) by urging the spring gear 3049 meshing with the motor gear 3047 and the spring gear 3049 in a certain rotational direction (counterclockwise direction). A spring 3050 that urges toward the stop position) is disposed, thereby preventing the upper movable decorative body 3011 from dropping due to its own weight and reducing the load on the motor 3045. In addition, a pair of photosensors 3051 for detecting the upper limit position and the lower limit position of the face slide base 3042 are disposed in the face slide base 3042, whereby the upper movable decorative body 3011 is set to the standby position or the effect position. It is possible to detect that each has been reached.

  Next, the right accessory device 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 188 to 190, the right accessory device 3100 includes a right movable decorative body 3101 and a right movable decorative body 3101 that are modeled after the “left hand” of a predetermined character. It is moved in the left-right direction between a standby position on the right side (see FIG. 179 (a)) and an effect position (see FIG. 179 (b)) that is in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (position on the right side of the center). The driving unit 3102 and a linear guide portion 3126 for guiding the moving direction of the right movable decorative body 3101 relative to the driving unit 3102 are configured. The right movable decorative body 3101 corresponds to the “left hand” of a predetermined character, but since it is arranged on the right side when viewed from the front, members related to the right movable decorative body 3101 are included for convenience of explanation. , “Right” or “right side” may be used for explanation.

  As shown in FIGS. 189 and 191, the right movable decorative body 3101 includes a right arm main body base 3105 and a decorative body that is arranged on the front side of the right arm main body 3105 and is shaped like a “left hand”. A frame-shaped right arm body cover 3106 that imitates the outer shell, and is attached to the upper surface of the right arm body cover 3106 and the right finger body cover 3106 that are attached to the left side surface of the right arm body cover 3106 A right thumb portion 3108 imitating a “thumb”, a finger side portion 3109 imitating a fingertip portion from “index finger” to “little finger” attached to the left side surface of the right finger main body 3107, and an opening 3106a of the right arm main body cover 3106 And a lens base 3110 having a lens portion 3111 that imitates the back of the hand and displays the word “fist” on the surface. It is. An additional decorative portion 3105a is provided at the upper right end portion of the right arm main body base 3105 so as to be fitted into the upper right corner portion (notch portion) of the right arm main body cover 3106 and form a part of a continuous “hand”. . The right finger main body 3107 has a plurality of through holes 3107a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a light emitting portion of a light emitting substrate 3313 disposed on the rear side is inserted. The right thumb portion 3108 is also provided with a through hole 3108a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a thumb lens 3114 disposed on the rear side is inserted. Further, a light emitting substrate 3116 for projecting light to the lens unit 3111 and the thumb lens 3114 is provided on the rear side of the lens unit 3111 and the thumb lens 3114. Note that a flat cable 3119 for supplying power is connected to the light emitting board 3116, and the flat cable 3119 is wired along the back surface of the right arm main body base 3105, and is connected to the additional decorative portion 3105 a of the right arm main body base 3105. It is pulled out through the formed slit 3105b. Further, the flat cable 3119 is supported by the right arm main body base 3105 by the cable presser 3120 so that it does not interfere with the flat cable 3119 (that is, the flat cable 3119 is not caught) while the right movable ornament 3101 is moving. ing. The tip of the flat cable 3119 is connected to a relay board 3166 supported by a cable cover 3165 (see FIG. 192). The cable cover 3165 is fixed to the back box 3001.

  In addition, an accommodation portion 3117 for accommodating a movable side guide member 3128 of a linear guide portion 3126 described later is attached to the lower rear portion of the right arm main body base 3105. The accommodating portion 3117 is made of a member having a substantially U-shaped vertical cross section, and a rack 3118 formed along the left-right direction is provided on the upper surface serving as the outer surface of the accommodating space.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 192, the drive unit 3102 includes a base member 3125 and a drive unit 3150 disposed on the base member 3125. The drive unit 3150 includes a motor 3151 attached to the back side of the base member 3125 via a heat radiating plate 3158 and a ground metal plate 3163, and a motor disposed on the front side of the base member 3125 and connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 3151. The gear 3152 meshes with the motor gear 3152 and meshes with the three transmission gears 3156 arranged side by side in the horizontal direction (that is, the moving direction of the right movable ornament 3101) and the leftmost transmission gear 3156. And a gear 3153 meshed with the rack 3118 of the right movable decorative body 3101. The three transmission gears 3156 and 3153 are rotatably supported by a base member 3125 and a cover member 3157 disposed on the front side thereof. Further, a sensor mounting member 3160 having an L-shape in front view is disposed on the back side of the base member 3125, and a detection piece 3117a (formed in the housing portion 3117 by a photosensor 3161 mounted on the sensor mounting member 3160). (See FIG. 191), it is possible to detect that the right movable decorative body 3101 is located at the standby position. A protrusion 3162 that protrudes forward is integrally formed at the left end of the sensor attachment member 3160, and when the right movable decorative body 3101 moves to the effect position, a stopper 3117b ( 191) hits the protrusion 3162, and stops at the effect position.

  By the way, in general, when such an accessory device is configured, a guide portion is provided to smoothly move the movable decorative body in the horizontal direction. As the guide member, the movable decorative body is set to a standby position and an effect position. The guide member is usually arranged on the rear side of the movable decorative body so that the movable decorative body is moved to the standby position so as not to impair the appearance. Even in the case, it is formed short so as not to be exposed to the player side. For this reason, when the movable decorative body is moved greatly, that is, when the movable decorative body is moved to the effect position, the movable decorative body cannot be greatly protruded toward the center of the center accessory 2300, and a great impact can be given to the player. It has become difficult.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 189 and 192, the linear guide portion 3126 of this example includes a base side guide member 3127 attached to the attachment portion 3125 a on the lower front surface of the base member 3125, and the right movable decorative body 3101. The movable side guide member 3128 attached to the back surface (accommodating portion 3117) and the idler rail 3129 interposed between the base side guide member 3127 and the movable side guide member 3128 are configured. That is, the base side guide member 3127, the idle rail 3129, and the movable side guide member 3128 are arranged in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction between the base member 3125 and the right side movable decorative body 3101. Here, since the idle rail 3129 is supported so as to be freely movable in a predetermined direction with respect to the movable guide member 3128, when a right and left direction force acts on the right movable ornament 3101 via the rack 3118, the right movable ornament A movable guide member 3128 attached to the back surface of 3101 slides on the idle rail 3129, and the right movable decorative body 3101 is guided in the left-right direction. Moreover, since the idle rail 3129 is supported so as to be freely movable in the left-right direction with respect to the base side guide member 3127 attached to the front surface of the base member 3125, the idle rail 3129 is moved along with the movement of the right movable decorative body 3101. It slides with respect to the base side guide member 3127. That is, the right movable decorative body 3101 moves by a length obtained by adding the movement distance of the idle rail 3129 relative to the base guide member 3127 and the movement distance of the movable guide member 3128 relative to the idle rail 3129. In other words, the guide of the right movable decorative body 3101 between the standby position and the effect position is divided into the guide of the idle rail 3129 with respect to the base side guide member 3127 and the guide of the movable side guide member 3128 with respect to the idle rail 3129. The For this reason, the lengths in the predetermined direction of the base side guide member 3127, the idler rail 3129, and the movable side guide member 3128 are set so as not to be exposed (that is, hidden behind the right side movable decorative body 3101 in the standby position). ) Even if it is formed relatively short, the right movable decorative body 3101 can be moved greatly to increase the impact of the right movable decorative body 3101 in the production.

  In particular, the base-side guide member 3127, the movable-side guide member 3128, and the idle rail 3129 constituting the linear guide portion 3126 are all equal in the left-right direction (moving direction) and smaller than the right-side movable decorative body 3101. Is formed. Therefore, in a state where the right movable ornament 3101 is overlapped in front of the base member 3125, that is, in the standby position, all of the linear guide portion 3126 is shielded by the right movable ornament 3101. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the appearance from being deteriorated due to the exposure of the linear guide portion 3126. Further, since the lengths of the base side guide member 3127 and the floating rail 3129 are equal to the length of the movable side guide member 3128 limited by the size of the right side movable decoration body 3101, the movement distance of the right side movable decoration body 3101 (that is, The interval between the standby position and the effect position) can be set to the maximum length within a range where the linear guide portion 3126 is not exposed.

  The base side guide member 3127 is a member having a substantially U-shaped cross section, and has a flat plate-like first attachment portion 3131 attached to the base member 3125 and a thickness direction (length in the depth direction) of the idle rail 3129 protruding from both ends in the width direction. And a first groove portion 3133 formed along the left-right direction (moving direction) is provided on the inner surface of the first clip piece 3132. Yes. Further, the movable side guide member 3128 is a U-shaped member similar to the base side guide member 3127, and has a flat plate-like second attachment portion 3135 attached to the accommodation portion 3117 of the right side movable decorative body 3101, and both ends in the width direction thereof. It consists of a pair of second sandwiching pieces 3136 sandwiching approximately half of the protruding idler rail 3129 in the thickness direction from the opposite side (front side) of the base-side guide member 3127. 2nd groove part 3137 formed along (direction) is provided.

  On the other hand, the idle rail 3129 is a columnar member, and a third groove 3139 that faces the first groove 3133 of the base side guide member 3127 and a fourth groove 3140 that faces the second groove 3137 of the movable side guide member 3128. Are provided along the left-right direction. A plurality of first spheres 3142 that roll in the groove portions 3133 and 3139 are provided between the first groove portion 3133 and the third groove portion 3139, and between the second groove portion 3137 and the fourth groove portion 3140. Are provided with a plurality of second spheres 3143 that roll in the groove portions 3137 and 3140. Therefore, the sliding of the idler rail 3129 with respect to the base-side guide member 3127 and the sliding of the movable-side guide member 3128 with respect to the idler rail 3129 are made smoother while the overall size of the linear guide portion 3126 is made relatively small. The right movable decorative body 3101 can be stably moved between the standby position shown in FIG. 193 (a) and the effect position shown in FIG. 193 (b).

  By the way, for example, when the right movable decorative body 3101 moves to the effect position (that is, when the movable guide member 3128 is pulled out with respect to the idle rail 3129 and the idle rail 3129 is pulled out with respect to the base guide member 3127), Since the load of the movable decorative body 3101 is concentrated on the contact portions between the respective guide members 3128, 3129, 3127, when the weight of the right movable decorative body 3101 is large, the respective guide members 3128, 3129, 3127 are moved. There is a concern that it will be difficult to return to the standby position, or that the end side of each guide member 3128, 3129, 3127 will be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of this example, groove portions 3133, 3139, 3137, and 3140 are formed on the surfaces facing each other, and a plurality of spheres (a first sphere 3142 and a second sphere 3143 are interposed between the groove portions. ) Is provided so as to roll, the load of the right movable decorative body 3101 applied to the contact portion can be dispersed, and consequently the breakage of the respective guide members 3128, 3129, 3127 and the like are suppressed, and the motor The load of 3151 can be reduced.

  By the way, when the sliding resistance of the idle rail 3129 with respect to the base side guide member 3127 is larger than the sliding resistance of the movable side guide member 3128 with respect to the idle rail 3129, when the right movable decorative body 3101 moves, first, the movable side guide is provided. The member 3128 slides (first guide) with respect to the idle rail 3129, and then the idle rail 3129 slides (second guide) with respect to the base side guide member 3127. On the contrary, when the sliding resistance of the movable guide member 3128 with respect to the idle rail 3129 is larger than the sliding resistance of the idle rail 3129 with respect to the base guide member 3127, the idle rail 3129 is first guided to the base side. After sliding with respect to the member 3127 (second guide), the movable side guide member 3128 slides with respect to the idle rail 3129 (first guide). That is, in either case, after one guide is finished (after reaching the end position), the other guide is started. According to this, the right movable decorative body 3101 is moved from the standby position to the effect position. During the movement, the sliding part is switched, and there is a possibility that the smooth movement may be lost for a moment (that is, a feeling of being caught).

  On the other hand, in this example, the number of first spheres 3142 provided between the first groove 3133 of the base side guide member 3127 and the third groove 3139 of the idler rail 3129 and the second of the movable side guide member 3128 are set. Since the number of second spheres 3143 provided between the groove 3137 and the fourth groove 3140 of the idle rail 3129 is equal to each other, the sliding resistance of the idle rail 3129 with respect to the base side guide member 3127 and the idle The sliding resistance of the movable side guide member 3128 with respect to the rail 3129 can be substantially matched. Therefore, when the right movable decorative body 3101 moves, two slides (guides) are simultaneously performed, and as a result, it is possible to smoothly guide the entire moving range.

  190, the movable side guide member 3128 (the part that supports the right movable decorative body 3101) and the rack 3118 (the part that receives the rotational force of the gear 3153) are provided adjacent to each other. The moment to rotate the right movable decorative body 3101 can be kept small, and the load applied to the linear guide portion 3126 can be reduced. In particular, since the rack 3118 is integrally formed on the outer wall surface (upper surface) of the accommodating portion 3117 that accommodates the movable side guide member 3128, the movable side guide member 3128 and the rack 3118 are compared with those in which the rack 3118 is configured as a separate member. Can be assembled in a parallel state. In addition, since the rack 3118 can be disposed closer to the movable guide member 3128, the burden on the linear guide portion 3126 can be further reduced.

  In addition, the drive unit 3102 (that is, the motor 3151, the gear 3153, the plurality of transmission gears 3156, and the like) provided for moving the right movable decorative body 3101 is located behind the right movable decorative body 3101 in the standby position. Therefore, one decorative unit including the drive unit 3102 and the right movable decorative body 3101 can be configured to be relatively small. For example, another decorative body or mechanism is provided above or below the right movable decorative body 3101. Even when the part is incorporated, it is easy to arrange the decoration unit in a limited space. Since the standby position is a position shielded by the game panel 600 or the center accessory 2300, the drive unit 3102 is not visually recognized even when the right movable decorative body 3101 is moved to the effect position.

  Further, as a transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotational force of the motor 3151 to the gear 3153, a motor gear 3152 and a plurality of transmission gears 3156 are provided, and these are arranged in a line along the left-right direction (movement direction). Therefore, although the motor 3151 and the gear 3153 are arranged apart from each other, the transmission mechanism can be elongated along the left-right direction without increasing the size. Therefore, these transmission mechanisms can be juxtaposed while being close to the rack 3118, and can be easily accommodated on the rear side of the right movable decorative body 3101 in the standby position (FIG. 193 (a)). )reference).

  Next, the left accessory device 3200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 194 and 195, the left side accessory device 3200 includes a left movable ornament body 3201 and a left movable ornament body 3201 that are shaped like the “right hand” of a predetermined character. It moves in the left-right direction between a standby position on the left side (see FIG. 179 (a)) and an effect position (see FIG. 179 (b)) which is the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a position closer to the left than the center). The drive unit 3202 and a linear guide portion 3226 for guiding the moving direction of the left movable decorative body 3201 relative to the drive unit 3202 are configured. Note that the external appearance of the left movable ornament 3201 is symmetric with the external appearance of the right accessory device 3100, and the left accessory device 3200 is composed of the same members as the right accessory device 3100. For this reason, the same number is attached | subjected to the same (including symmetrical shape) components here, and detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. Note that the character “god” is written on the lens portion 3211 of the left movable decorative body 3201.

  By the way, in general, even if a plurality of movable decorative bodies are provided, if the movable decorative bodies do not operate so frequently and the timing of the operation is difficult to predict, the player must Attention is paid to the display screen 1401 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a screen that changes almost continuously) rather than the movable decorative body that is waiting for the game, and even if the movable decorative body moves to the effect position, the game The person may not be aware of the movement or may not be able to fully enjoy the movement of the movable decorative body. In particular, when the movement of each movable decorative body is relatively small, it is impossible to give a large impact to the player, and it becomes difficult to attract the player's attention.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), the display screen 1401 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is a first strip-shaped display area 1401a assigned to the lower side and the other part of the display screen 1401. It is divided into two display areas 1401b, the notification information H is displayed in the first display area 1401a, and the effect image E is displayed in the second display area 1401b, and three movable decorative bodies, that is, the upper movable decorative body When 3011, the right movable ornament 3101 and the left movable ornament 3201 all move to the effect position, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), the second display area 1401b of the display screen 1401, that is, the effect image E is displayed. Almost the entire area is shielded by these movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201. According to this, since the effect image E that has been noticed suddenly disappears, the player can be surprised and attention can be drawn to the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 that are the cause. In addition, since the three movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 appear over substantially the entire area of the second display area 1401 b, the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 can be made extremely large, and a powerful performance operation This makes it possible to further enhance interest in games.

  On the other hand, in the first display area 1401a of the display screen 1401, notification information H necessary for grasping the state of the game is displayed. This first display area 1401a includes all the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, 3201. Since it is not shielded even if it moves to the effect position, the notification information H can be grasped continuously even during the effect operation by the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201. Also, in order to keep the notification information H only visible among the effect image E and the notification information H displayed on the display screen 1401, the effect image E and the notification information H are made to be recognized as information having different meanings. be able to.

  Note that the notification information H of this example includes a holding symbol related to the big hit lottery. As will be described in detail later, a hold / digestion process is performed for the big hit lottery, and it is detected that the game ball has won the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 during the change of the special symbol. In this case, execution of processing based on the detection is made to wait, and the waiting number is stored as the starting memory number. Then, the number of reserved symbols (in this example, “star marks”) corresponding to the number of starting memories is displayed in the first display area 1401a in a series of symbol rows according to the execution order of processing.

  Further, in this example, three movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 that are related to each other gather together in front of the display screen 1401 to cover substantially the entire area of the second display area 1401 b, and thus each movable decorative body 3011, 3101. , 3201 becomes stronger, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, 3201 can be recognized as one movable accessory unit. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the dynamic feeling and power of the production.

  In addition, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies are provided with a pair of right and left right movable decorative bodies 3101 and left movable decorative bodies 3201 that move in the horizontal direction, and one upper movable decorative body 3011 that is provided on the upper side and moves in the vertical direction. Thus, it is possible to relatively easily shield the substantially entire area of the area (that is, the second display area 1401b) where the strip-shaped first display area 1401a provided on the lower side of the display screen 1401 is left. It should be noted that only the pair of left and right movable decorative bodies 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 can cover the entire second display area 1401b by increasing the length in the vertical direction, but the upper movable decorative body 3011, Combining the upper movable decorative body 3011 that moves in a direction different from the moving direction (left and right direction) of the pair of left and right right movable decorative bodies 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 makes the movement of the entire movable decorative body complicated. It becomes possible to enhance the fun. In particular, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is formed by imitating a “face” of a predetermined character, and the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 imitate the “hand” of the character. Therefore, the arrangement and the moving direction of the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 correspond to the actual movement of the character. For this reason, the impact of each movable decorative body 3011, 3101, 3201 can be increased, and the character can be made realistic by the movement imitating the original movement of the character.

  Also, the upper movable decorative body 3011 that is modeled to imitate the face of the character is pushed closer to the player side than the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 that are modeled to simulate the left and right hands. Are arranged. For this reason, it is possible to make the character appear three-dimensionally and to generate an image that the character has popped out of the liquid crystal display device 1400, thereby further increasing the force of the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201.

  Further, as described above, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is provided with the head guard 3013, and the head guard 3013 moves in a direction different from the moving direction (that is, the vertical direction) of the upper movable decorative body 3011. Therefore, the movement of the entire movable decorative body can be made more complicated, and the production effect can be enhanced. In particular, since the head guard 3013 moves so as to be lifted obliquely upward after it is detected that the upper movable decorative body 3011 has reached the effect position, the upper movable decorative body 3011 can be operated stepwise. Attention to the upper movable decorative body 3011 can be further increased. Further, in the upper movable decorative body 3011, the head guard 3013 moves without changing the shielding area to the second display area 1401b. Therefore, even after the head guard 3013 moves, the substantially entire area of the second display area 1401b is shielded. can do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), when the upper movable decorative body 3011 is in the standby position, the rock decoration 2305 is disposed adjacent to the moving direction side of the head guard 3013. The image of the head guard 3013 moving can be prevented from being aroused by the player, and as a result, the operation of the head guard 3013 can be unexpected and the entertainment can be further enhanced.

  Further, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is provided with light emitting means (a pat lens 3016 and a light emitting substrate 3017) (see FIG. 183) for emitting light toward the player, and the head guard 3013 moves in a specific direction. As a result, the exposed area of the patrol lens 3016 gradually increases. Therefore, the movement of the head guard 3013 can be visually recognized together with the change in the exposed area (that is, the light emission area) of the patrol lens 3016, and the operation of the head guard 3013 can be made more conspicuous, thereby giving a great impact to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are partially visible from the player side even when in the standby position, so the right side hidden in the standby position. The presence of the movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 can be made conscious and expectation can be given to their operation. In the standby position, since the remaining part is shielded by the center accessory 2300, an effect position (see FIG. 179 (b)) where the entire view of the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 is visible. The standby position (see FIG. 179 (a)) that is partially hidden and invisible can be differentiated, and the reduction in impact at the effect position can be suppressed. Further, the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 have mutually different areas of visible portions at the standby position, although the external shapes are symmetrical to each other. Specifically, the left movable decorative body 3201 is exposed more than the right movable decorative body 3101. Therefore, the player can be aware that the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are visible and hidden by the movement, and can be interested in their operations.

  The right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are provided with lens portions 3111 and 3211. When the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are in the standby position, the lens portions 3111 and 3211 are provided. It becomes visible when it is shielded and the production position is reached. Therefore, the effect position and the standby position can be further differentiated, and a decrease in impact at the effect position can be suppressed. In particular, since the lens portions 3111 and 3211 are not related to the external shapes of the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201, it is possible to further enhance the fun of production by the appearance of an unexpected decoration. .

  Next, the shelf unit 3300 will be described. The shelf unit 3300 is disposed substantially at the center of the back box 3001 (see FIG. 178), and rolls the game ball taken in the center accessory 2300 (see FIG. 173) in the left-right direction. The path of the game ball can be changed by reciprocating part of the rolling surface in the left-right direction. 196 to 198 will be described in detail. The shelf unit 3300 includes a shelf base 3301 having a corrugated upper surface and a rolling surface attached to the front surface of the shelf base 3301 for rolling a game ball. A side slope member 3302, a central lower substrate base 3303 which is attached to the lower side of the center in the left-right direction of the rear slope member 3302 and can be decorated with a light emitting substrate 3313, is disposed above the central lower substrate base 3303, and A movable shelf 3304 that can move in the left-right direction with respect to the side slope member 3302 and a shelf drive mechanism unit 3305 that is arranged on the rear side of the rear slope member 3302 and moves the movable shelf 3304 are configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 and 199, the shelf driving mechanism unit 3305 is attached to the back side of the shelf base 3301, and has a motor 3306 provided with a rotation shaft protruding from the front surface of the shelf base 3301, and the shelf base 3301. The motor arm 3307 connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 3306 on the front side of the motor 3306 and the vertical slit 3308a into which the tip of the motor arm 3307 is inserted are supported at the left end and slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the shelf base 3301. The upper end portion of the slider 3308 and the movable shelf 3304 are connected to each other by a pair of guide pins 3309 disposed through the long hole portion 3302h of the rear slope member 3302. That is, when the motor 3306 operates, the rotational motion is converted into a left and right linear motion by the motor arm 3307 and the slider 3308, and the movable shelf 3304 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction. The guide pin 3309 is provided with a bush 3310, which can be smoothly moved in the left-right direction without being displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the rear slope member 3302. Further, the position of the movable shelf 3304 is detected by a photo sensor 3311.

  As shown in FIGS. 196 and 198, the rear slope member 3302 has an upper rolling surface 3302a formed in a wave shape and an intermediate rolling surface 3302d formed on the front side thereof. The upper rolling surface 3302a communicates with the above-described warp passage 2316 (see FIG. 172) at the left end, and allows the game ball sent through the warp passage 2316 to roll in the left-right direction. In particular, the upper rolling surface 3302a has a substantially central portion in the left-right direction that rises in a mountain shape, and a first outflow portion 3302b that is formed in a downward slope toward the front is provided at the top portion, and further on the left and right outer sides thereof. A second outflow portion 3302c formed in a downward slope toward the front is provided in each valley portion. That is, when the momentum of the game ball rolling in the left-right direction is no longer in the central portion (top portion) in the left-right direction, the game ball is flowed forward from the first first outflow portion 3302b, When there is no momentum in any part other than the central part, the second outflow part 3302c flows out forward.

  The middle rolling surface 3302d is composed of a pair of rolling surfaces spaced apart from each other so as to sandwich the movable shelf 3304 disposed in the center, and flows out from the second outflow portion 3302c of the upper rolling surface 3302a. It is possible to distribute the game balls to the left and right (outside or inside). A third outflow portion 3302e formed in a downward slope toward the front is provided at a position outside the middle rolling surface 3302d, and the game balls distributed to the outside on the middle rolling surface 3302d are first. It flows out from the three outflow portions 3302e forward. Further, a fourth outflow portion 3302f formed in a downward slope toward the inside is provided at the inner end of the middle rolling surface 3302d, and the game balls distributed inside on the middle rolling surface 3302d are provided. The fourth outflow portion 3302f flows out toward the center in the left-right direction. Note that a gap is provided between the fourth outflow portion 3302f and the movable shelf 3304, and the movable shelf 3304 can be moved in the left-right direction. When the movable shelf 3304 moves to the right side, it can approach the fourth outflow portion 3302f formed on the right side of the rear slope member 3302, and the game ball flowing out from the fourth outflow portion 3302f can be received by the movable shelf 3304. On the other hand, when the movable shelf 3304 moves to the left side, the movable shelf 3304 approaches the fourth outflow portion 3302f formed on the left side of the rear slope member 3302, and the game ball that has flowed out of the fourth outflow portion 3302f is received by the movable shelf 3304. It becomes possible. In other words, the game ball that has flowed out of the fourth outflow portion 3302f can be delivered only when the movable shelf 3304 is approaching the fourth outflow portion 3302f, and in other cases (that is, when it is separated) ) Falls from the fourth outflow portion 3302f and is sent to the upper surface of the central lower substrate base 3303. Note that the game ball that has flowed out from the first outflow portion 3302b of the upper rolling surface 3302a always falls on the movable shelf 3304 regardless of the movable position of the movable shelf 3304. The upper surface of the movable shelf 3304 is curved in an arc shape so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest, and it is possible to guide the received game ball to the center and enter the chance port 3302g located behind the movable shelf 3304. It has become.

  The game ball that has entered the chance opening 3302g is guided by a ball guiding portion 3314 (see FIG. 199) disposed on the back side of the rear slope member 3302, and further, a passage 3303a (see FIG. 196) through the chance outlet 2301a of the center base plate 2301 (see FIG. 175) to the gaming area 605 directly above the first starting port 2001. A game ball that has flowed out from the third outflow portion 3302e of the middle rolling surface 3302d, or a game ball that has fallen from the fourth outflow portion 3302f of the middle rolling surface 3302d (that is, a game that could not be delivered to the movable shelf 3304). Sphere) is sent to the front slope portion 2302 (see FIG. 172) disposed on the front side of the rear slope member 3302, and is played from a relatively wide fifth outflow portion 2302a formed at the central portion of the front slope portion 2302. It is discharged to the area 605.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 197, the shelf base 3301 is formed of a transparent member and includes a shelf decoration 3316 inside, so that the decoration of the shelf decoration 3316 can be visually recognized from the upper surface of the shelf base 3301. It has become. A light emitting board 3317 supported by a board cover 3318 is provided below the shelf decoration 3316, and the shelf decoration 3316 can be decorated with light emitted from the light emitting board 3317. .

  Next, the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 200, the liquid crystal display device 1400 mainly includes a box-shaped control board case cover 1402 whose front side is opened, a liquid crystal control board (not shown) housed in the control board case cover 1402, and a liquid crystal display. It includes a module (not shown), a set plate (not shown) for mounting the liquid crystal module, and a transparent protective plate 1403 that covers the front surface of the liquid crystal module. The set plate is provided with fixing pieces that protrude outward on the right side and the left side, respectively, and the left side fixing piece is locked to a liquid crystal support portion (not shown) of the back box 3001 and the right side is fixed. The fixed piece is detachably fixed by a liquid crystal lock member 3410 (see FIG. 203).

  As shown in FIG. 201, a pair of liquid crystal edge decorations 3400 that decorate both the left and right sides of the display screen 1401 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided on the left and right edges of the opening 3001 c in the back box 3001. The liquid crystal edge decoration 3400 includes a decoration portion 3400a having a plurality of windows on the surface and a light emitting substrate (not shown) that projects light through a lens (not shown), and projects light toward the player. It is possible to shine.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 201, on the lower side of the back box 3001, a left sphere passage 3403 for guiding a game ball won in the general winning opening 2004, 2102 and a game ball won in the general winning opening 2155 are guided. A right ball passage 3401, a first start ball passage 3402 for guiding a game ball won in the first start opening 2001, a big winning opening ball passage 3404 for guiding a game ball won in the big winning opening 2330a, A second start opening ball passage 3405 for guiding a winning game ball to the second start opening 2002 is formed, and a ball passage 3401, a big winning opening ball passage 3404, and a second start opening ball passage 3405 are formed. Is closed by the right passage cover 3402, and the ball passage 3403 and the first start-up ball passage 3402 are closed by the left passage cover 3404. Each ball passage 3401 and 3403 is provided with a general winning port sensor 2014 for detecting a winning game ball. Also, in the back box 3001, a mounting portion 3001z having a rectangular shape for mounting the magnetic sensor 3406 on the lower left side on the upstream side of the ball path 3404 for the big prize opening is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount so as to be lowered to the right. Except for a part of the right end side corresponding to the connector 3406ba of the magnetic sensor 3406, each end side is formed to protrude toward the near side, and is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. Thus, even if the magnetic sensor 3406 is inserted into the attachment portion 3001z from the front, the connector 3406ba of the magnetic sensor 3001z and the attachment portion 3001z do not interfere with each other. Also, in the back box 3001, a mounting portion 3001z having a rectangular shape for mounting the magnetic sensor 3406 on the left side upstream of the first starting-port ball passage 3402 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount to rise to the right. As described above, each end side is formed to protrude toward the front side except for a part of the left end side corresponding to the connector 3406ba of the magnetic sensor 3406, and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. Thus, even if the magnetic sensor 3406 is inserted into the attachment portion 3001z from the front, the connector 3406ba of the magnetic sensor 3001z and the attachment portion 3001z do not interfere with each other. Thus, when the back box 3001 is viewed from the front, the two magnetic sensors 3406 are arranged in a C shape. By providing these two magnetic sensors 3406, an illegal game using a magnet or the like can be detected.

  In the present embodiment, since the two magnetic sensors 3406 have the same performance, the magnetic sensor 3406 inserted into the mounting portion 3001z that rises to the right will be described here. When the magnetic sensor 3406 is attached in the state shown in FIG. 201, the left side surface 3406a of the rectangular box shape has a sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the side surface 3406a when the back box 3001 is viewed from the front. Magnetism in the first detection region having strong directivity can be detected, and a rectangular box-shaped right side surface 3406b opposite to the side surface 3406a is perpendicular to the side surface 3406b. It is possible to detect magnetism in the second detection region having high directivity with high sensitivity. On the side surface 3406b, a connector 3406ba for electrically connecting the magnetic sensor 3406 is provided so as to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the side surface 3406b. “High sensitivity in the vertical direction” means that the side surface 3406a and the side surface 3406b have higher sensitivity in the vertical direction than the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. . In other words, the first inspection region having high directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction on the side surface 3406a and the second inspection region having high directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction on the side surface 3406b are each surrounded by a sphere. It is a wide area.

  As shown in FIG. 203, on the rear side of the back box 3001, a motor drive board 3412 that drives each motor individually, a lamp drive board 3413 that drives LEDs mounted on each decorative board, and a drive signal A relay board 3415, a panel relay terminal board 3417, and an upper left relay board 3418 are provided. Note that the motor drive board 3412 and the lamp drive board 3413 are supported by a board set plate 3411 and covered with a board cover 3414. Further, the relay substrate 3415 is provided in a state of being accommodated in the substrate cover 3416.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral board 4010 group includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. A liquid crystal control board 3181 for controlling display of an image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 204, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-described components. RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2349 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof Detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 2014 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the magnetic sensor 3406 attached to the gate sensor 2202, the general prize opening sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013, and the back unit 3000, respectively. The detection signal is input via the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start opening solenoid 2033 and the big prize opening solenoid 2347 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3247, or the main control Via the I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3247, and the function display board 640a, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol memory. A drive signal is output to the display unit 644, the normal symbol display unit 645, the normal symbol storage display unit 646, the game state display unit 647, the round display unit 648, and the hold state display unit 3152 of the center accessory 2300.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and the pachinko machine from the payout control board 1186. Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 204, a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the above-described firing motor 695, and the above. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 204, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (game information) related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to receiving a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, or detection signals from the ball break switch 778, the count switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are connected to the relay terminal in the prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 815 or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, payout is performed based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops driving signal to the payout motor 815 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the firing motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotational speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. And a firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that about 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  As described above, the handle device 460 (operation handle unit 410) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. When the touch operation unit 464 of the operation handle unit 410 is touched, the touch sensor When the single button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 204, the peripheral control board 4140 for effect control in the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality performance with a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and the like. A sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored are configured.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the various commands. The door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp driving board 3167 or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4. A game board side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of the LED is output to the lamp driving board 3167, or the left rotating lamp motor 245 and the right rotating lamp of the top lamp lighting unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 Motor drive the door frame side motor drive command to output the rotation drive signal to the motor 265 and the central rotary lamp motor 285 A game board side motor drive command that outputs a rotation drive signal to the drive motors 2048, 3021, 3045, 3151, and 3306 provided in the game board 4 is output to the motor drive board 3013a, and the sound ROM 4140d A control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound signal is output to the sound source IC 4140c, or a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is output to the liquid crystal control board 3181.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 3181 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3167 and the motor driving board 3013a. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3167 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. , 225, 296, etc., and each lighting decoration board 3606 provided in the game board 4 or a glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command. To the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013a sends a rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command to the left rotation lamp motor 245 and right rotation lamp motor 265 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , And output to the central rotary lamp motor 285, and output rotational drive signals to various drive motors 2048, 3021, 3045, 3151, 3306 provided in the game board 4 based on the received game board side motor drive command To do.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a position detection sensor (photo) for detecting the movable positions of the rotation effect device 2003, the upper accessory device 3010, the right accessory device 3100, the left accessory device 3200, and the shelf unit 3300 of the game board 4, respectively. Detection signals from the sensors 2051, 3028, 3051, 3161, 3311) are respectively input via the motor drive board 3013a, and the original position is grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. Are input via the sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a, and the rotational positions of the rotary lamps 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 3181 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 3181 or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 is input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. The main button 371 includes a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. Yes.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 through the lamp driving board 3167 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control board 3181 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010, as shown in the figure, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, and a liquid crystal control that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data. ROM 4150b, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the above-described liquid crystal display device 1400, character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later. Then, the VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state. Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”). Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by main scanning for setting a state and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing main scanning in a direction crossing one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 3181 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs the liquid crystal display device 1400 as main scanning based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, liquid crystal display is performed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. In order from the left to the right of the device 1400, the data is output to pixels for one line.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter substrate 3017a.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is played by the game panel when the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 arranged in front of the game 600. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 410, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Also, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  The game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2300 is guided to the right region of the center accessory 2300, enters the gate 2201 disposed on the right side of the center accessory 2300, and is detected by the gate sensor 2202. Based on the detection signal, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is displayed in a variable manner (the normal symbol display 645 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green, and orange), A normal symbol based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, between 0.5 seconds and 7 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 645 emits light in red or green) ) The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 645 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2032 that close the second start port 2002 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.25 seconds and 3 seconds), A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2002.

  Note that the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the expansion time of the movable piece 2032 at the second start port 2002 change according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. When special random numbers (special lottery results) and symbol random numbers are extracted as “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)”, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased or the normal symbol changes The time may be changed to a short time, or the expansion time of the movable piece 2032 may be changed to a long time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern can be easily changed by replacing the table with a different table and selecting it.

  By the way, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol display 645 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the gate sensor 2202 detects the passing of the game ball, the normal symbol of the fluctuation is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the normal random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 646. This normal symbol memory display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories according to the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2202 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 and flowed down the left side of the center bonus 2300 is moved to the center of the game zone 605 below the center bonus 2300 by the left side winning port member 2100 and the left side guide member 2180. It has come to be sent. Then, when a game ball is won in the general winning port 2102 of the left side winning port member 2100 and is detected by the general winning port sensor 2014, the main control board 4100 detects the payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted, the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the storage tray 311. It has become so. Also, when a prize is awarded to the general prize opening 2004 of the start opening unit 2000 or the general prize opening 2155 of the right side prize prize opening member 2150, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls are provided in the same manner as the general prize opening 2102. In this case, the storage tray 311 is paid out.

  In the case where the game ball driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning ports 2004, 2102, 2155, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2333a, The game area 605 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins any of the general winning ports 2004, 2102, 2155, the first starting port 2001, and the big winning port 2333a, the winning game ball is not returned to the game area 605. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the panel 4.

  When a game ball is received in the first start port 2001 and detected by the first start port sensor 2011, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the storage tray 311.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate 2201 and is detected by the gate sensor 2202 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of movable pieces 2032 that close the second start opening 2002. When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2002 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2349 when the winning becomes possible after being expanded for a predetermined time, the main control board 4100 or the like is used. Thus, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 and is detected by the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2349, the first start port The opening 2001 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number, and the second start opening 2002 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 or second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the blade 2338 of the big prize opening unit 2330 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) is generated, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2333a during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained.

  Note that, in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display by the entry of the game ball into the gate 2201. When the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the start opening 2001, 2002 and the first start opening sensor 2011, When detected by the second start port sensor 2349, the first symbol extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2349 until the special symbol variation display is possible. The special random number or the second special random number is stored and the display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random number is stored in the first special symbol memory display 643 or the second special random number. So as to display the pattern storage display 644. Each of the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection by the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2349 and the special random number of the second special random number are used as predetermined random numbers. By comparing with a judgment table (also called a big hit judgment table), it is judged whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. The first symbol random number and the symbol random number of the second symbol random number extracted based on the detection of the start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2349 are a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a symbol determination table). By collating, it is also determined whether it is “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, or “11R big hit”. In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “probability change short no hit”, “probability change hit”, “prompt change hit short”, “probability change short hit per”, and the like.

  The first special random number or the second special random number (special lottery result) extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001 and the second start port sensor 2349 is “small hit”. In this case, the main control board 4100 repeats an opening / closing pattern for closing the blade 2338 of the special prize opening unit 2330 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, for 0.05 seconds) a plurality of times (for example, twice). Thus, it is difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 2333a.

  On the other hand, if the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the blade 2338 of the big prize opening unit 2330 and then opens a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds). ) Or an opening / closing pattern that closes the blade 2338 when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2333a and any of the conditions for winning is satisfied. Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for “2R big hit”, 5 rounds for “5R big hit”, 11 rounds for “11R big hit”, respectively. Thus, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Further, in the case of “2R big hit”, although the same two rounds, the opening time of the big prize opening 2330a per round is set to the long open state (for example, about 30 seconds), and compared to the long open state. In the case of an extremely short short open state (for example, 0.05 seconds), it is controlled to either, and when it is controlled to the short open state, as in the case of “small hit”, It is difficult to win a game ball in the big prize opening 2333a.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, according to the first special random number or the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001 or the second start port sensor 2349 (special In addition to variably displaying the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640, the random number is also displayed in the second display area 1401b of the liquid crystal display device 1400. An effect image E (see FIG. 179) corresponding to (special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the variation of each symbol row in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed (for example, three columns; left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol). When the display is started and then stopped in sequence, and finally all symbol sequences are stopped, the special symbol extracted by the combination of the symbols that have been stopped (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) The result of random number determination is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, the effect image E which is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after the plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images E in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed while leaving one variable symbol sequence is specified conditions (reach; the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped with the same symbol) And the “reach effect image” is displayed so as to satisfy the state where the middle symbol is still variably displayed). As a special lottery result in which this “reach effect image” is displayed, There is “Leach Loss”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only an effect display relating to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 204). The variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 3181 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. ing. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  In the first display area 1401a (see FIG. 179) of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the number of special random numbers displayed on the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 (that is, the first special symbol memory display 644). The number of hold indications corresponding to the random number or the number of hold of the second special random number) is displayed as the notification information H. In the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644, the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission states of the respective LEDs, whereas in the first display area 1401a of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the memory is stored. Since the number of held holds matches the number of held displays to be displayed, generally, the player can easily grasp the number of held from the hold display, and the first display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 Attention is paid to the hold display displayed at 1401a.

[5. Directional movement of movable ornaments]
As shown in FIG. 179, in accordance with the effect image E displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of accessories, specifically, an upper accessory device 3010, a right accessory device 3100, a left accessory device 3200, The rotation effect device 2003 (see FIG. 158) is movable. In particular, the upper movable ornament 3011 of the upper accessory device 3010 is shaped to imitate the “face” of a predetermined character, and the right movable ornament 3101 and the left accessory of the right accessory device 3100. Since the left movable decorative body 3201 of the apparatus 3200 is shaped to imitate the “hand” of the character, the arrangement and movement direction of each movable decorative body 3011, 3101, 3201 is the actual movement of the character. The impact of each movable decorative body 3011, 3101, 3201 can be increased. The association remains important.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the upper accessory device 3010, the right accessory device 3100, and the left accessory device 3200 all move to the effect position, the second display area of the display screen 1401 is displayed. 1401b, that is, almost the entire region where the effect image E is displayed is shielded by these movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101 and 3201, so that the player can be surprised and the movable decoration that causes the game Attention can be drawn to the bodies 3011, 3101, 3201. In addition, since the plurality of movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 appear over almost the entire area of the second display area 1401 b, the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 can be seen to be extremely large, and powerful rendering operations Can further enhance the interest in games. The notification information H necessary for grasping the game state is displayed in the first display area 1401a. In the first display area 1401a, all the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101 and 3201 are located at the effect positions. Since it is not shielded even if it moves, the notification information H can be grasped continuously even during the rendering operation by the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the three movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 that are related to each other gather together in front of the display screen 1401 to cover substantially the entire area of the second display area 1401 b, respectively. The movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 are more strongly associated with each other, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 can be recognized as one movable accessory unit. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the dynamic feeling and power of the production. In particular, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is shaped to imitate the “face” of a predetermined character, and the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 imitate the “hand” of the character. Therefore, the arrangement and moving direction of the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 correspond to the actual movement of the character. For this reason, the impact of each movable decorative body 3011, 3101, 3201 can be increased, and the character can be made realistic by the movement imitating the original movement of the character. Further, the upper movable decorative body 3011 that is modeled to imitate the character's “face” is more playable than the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 that are modeled to simulate the left and right “hands”. Since the character is displayed in close proximity to the user, the character can be seen three-dimensionally, and an image as if the character has popped out of the display screen 1401 is generated to further increase the force of the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201. It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is provided with the head guard 3013 as an additional decorative portion, and the head guard 3013 moves in the moving direction of the upper movable decorative body 3011 (that is, the vertical direction). ) In a different direction, the overall movement can be made more complex, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In particular, after the upper movable decorative body 3011 moves from the upper standby position to the lower production position, the head guard 3013 which is a part of the upper movable decorative body 3011 starts to move in a specific direction. The body 3011 can be operated stepwise, and attention to the upper movable decorative body 3011 can be further increased. In the upper movable decorative body 3011, the head guard 3013 moves so that the shielding area to the second display area 1401b does not change. Therefore, even after the head guard 3013 moves, the substantially entire area of the second display area 1401b is shielded. can do.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is provided with the light emitting substrate 3017 that emits light toward the player, and when the head guard 3013 moves in a predetermined direction. Since the exposed area of the patrol lens 3016 gradually increases, the movement of the head guard 3013 can be visually recognized along with the change of the exposed area (that is, the light emitting area) of the patrol lens 3016, and the operation of the head guard 3013 is further enhanced. Standing up can make a big impact on the player.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are partially visible from the player side even when in the standby position, and are therefore hidden in the standby position. The presence of the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 can be made conscious, and expectations can be given to their operation. In addition, at the standby position, the remaining part is shielded by the center accessory 2300, so that the entire position of the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized and partly hidden and invisible. The stand-by position can be differentiated, and a decrease in impact at the effect position can be suppressed. Further, the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are symmetrical in appearance, but have different areas that can be visually recognized at the standby position. The player can be aware that the body 3201 is visible and hidden by movement, and can be interested in their movement. Furthermore, the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are provided with lens portions 3111 and 3211. The lens portions 3111 and 3211 are shielded when the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are in the standby position. Then, since it becomes visible when the production position is reached, the production position and the standby position can be further differentiated, and a reduction in impact at the production position can be suppressed. In particular, since the lens portions 3111 and 3211 are not related to the external shapes of the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201, it is possible to further enhance the fun of the production by the appearance of an unexpected decoration.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible. That is, in the above embodiment, three decorative bodies, that is, the upper movable decorative body 3011, the right movable decorative body 3101, and the left movable decorative body 3201 are provided as movable decorative bodies that shield the second display region 1401b of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Although shown, it may be shielded by two movable decorative bodies, or may be shielded by four or more movable decorative bodies. When the number of movable decorative bodies is small, the size of the movable decorative body is large, and it is possible to perform powerful operations. On the other hand, when the number of movable decorative bodies is large, the whole movement It becomes complicated and can enhance the interest of the production.

  In the above embodiment, when the right movable decorative body 3101 and the left movable decorative body 3201 are in the standby position, they are arranged so that a part of them can be viewed from the player side. , And may be completely shielded by the center accessory 2300. In addition, the upper movable decorative body 3011 is arranged so that the entire movable decorative body 3011 is visible from the player side in both the standby position and the production position. It may be shielded. By shielding the whole at the standby position in this way, it is possible to further increase the impact on the player when the movable decorative bodies 3011, 3101, and 3201 appear.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although what displayed a holding symbol as alerting | reporting information H in the 1st display area 1401a was shown, the information for suggesting operation regarding a game, for example, the information to operate an effect button, Information indicating so-called “right-handed” may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the movable display body 3011, 3101, 3201 is moved to the effect position so that the front of the first display area 1401 a is not blocked, but the first display area 1401 a is displayed. In addition, the display screen 1400 may be entirely covered, and a window portion where the notification information H can be visually recognized may be formed in a portion located in front of the first display area 1401a.

[6. Magnetic sensor]
Next, the detection area of the magnetic sensor 3406 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram for explaining the detection area of the magnetic sensor. In FIG. 205, the presence of a magnetic sensor that cannot actually be visually recognized through the game panel can be visually recognized in order to explain the detection area of the magnetic sensor.

  As described above, the magnetic sensor 3406 has a rectangular box shape, and when attached in the state shown in FIG. 201, the left side magnetic sensor 3406 (hereinafter referred to as “the left side magnetic sensor 3406” when viewed from the front). In the rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406a, it is possible to detect magnetism in the first detection region having a directivity having a strong sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the side surface 3406a. A rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406b, which is the side surface opposite to the side surface 3406a, can detect magnetism in the second detection region having directivity with a high sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the side surface 3406b. It has become.

  On the other hand, in the right side magnetic sensor 3406 (hereinafter referred to as “right side magnetic sensor 3406”) when viewed from the front of the figure, the rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406a has sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the side surface 3406a. Magnetism in the first detection region having strong directivity can be detected, and the rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406b, which is the side surface opposite to the side surface 3406a, has a sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the side surface 3406b. Can detect magnetism in the second detection region having strong directivity.

  As shown in FIG. 205, the left magnetic sensor 3406 includes an upper rolling surface 3302a on the shelf unit 3300 in the center accessory 2300 disposed at the approximate center of the game panel 600 (approximately the center of the game area 605), and the shelf unit. The 3300 middle rolling surface 3302d and the first start port 2001 provided in the start port unit 2000 disposed in the game area 605 below the center accessory 2300 are highly sensitive to the rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406b in the vertical direction. Two general features provided in the left side prize port member 2100 disposed in the game area 605 at the lower left side from the center in the horizontal direction of the game panel 600 so as to be within the first inspection area having directivity. Provided in the winning opening 2102 and the start opening unit 2000 arranged in the lower game area 605 in the game panel 600. One general winning opening 2004 is located on the back side of the gaming panel 600 so as to be located in a second inspection area having a directivity with high sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406b. The back box 3001 shown in FIG. 201 is disposed at a predetermined position (a position on the left side on the upstream side of the first starting-port ball path 3402).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 205, the magnetic sensor 3406 on the right side has an upper rolling surface 3302a on the shelf unit 3300 in the center accessory 2300 arranged at the approximate center of the game panel 600 (substantially the center of the game area 605), The middle rolling surface 3302d of the shelf unit 3300 and the first starting port 2001 of the starting port unit 2000 disposed in the game area 605 below the center accessory 2300 are vertically sensitive to the rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406b. In the game panel 600, the second start port 2002 of the start port unit 2000 disposed in the lower game region 605 of the game panel 600 so as to be within the first inspection region having strong directivity, One provided for the right side prize port member 2150 disposed in the lower game area 605 from the center to the right in the left-right direction. The prize winning opening 2102 is located on the back side of the gaming panel 600 and is shown in FIG. 201 so that the winning opening 2102 is positioned within the second inspection area having high directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction to the rectangular box-shaped side surface 3406b. The back box 3001 is disposed at a predetermined position (a position on the lower left side on the upstream side of the ball path 3404 for the big prize opening). In this way, the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the right magnetic sensor 3406 are arranged in a letter C shape when the game panel 600 is viewed from the front.

  Thus, the actual inspection region of the first inspection region and the second inspection region of the left magnetic sensor 3406 arranged in a letter C shape, and the first inspection region and the second inspection region of the right magnetic sensor 3406 In order to examine the actual inspection area with respect to the inspection area, an experiment was performed in which the reference magnet was moved from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the surface of the glass unit 450 as shown in FIG. When the magnetic sensor 3406 on the left side and the magnetic sensor 3406 on the right side detect magnetism enough to receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605, an ON signal is output, and magnetism that has not reached that level is detected. An OFF signal is output when no detection or no magnetism is detected. As a result of examining the inspection area based on the ON signal and the OFF signal, as shown in FIG. 205, the left magnetic sensor 3406 is located above the upper rolling surface 3302a of the shelf unit 3300 in the center accessory 2300 ( Specifically, a straight line passing through a position where the chance opening 3302g formed in the shelf unit 3300, the chance outlet 2301a formed in the frame-shaped center base plate 2301, and the first starting opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2000 is arranged. Is a center line, a region RA indicated by a two-dot chain line extending from the upper rolling surface 3302a on the left side of the center line to the lower side of the first starting port 2001 of the starting port unit 2000 is a first inspection region. From below the left side guide member 2180, below the general winning port 2004 of the start port unit 2000 Region RB indicated by two-dot chain line over to the lower free left winning opening member 2100 is in the second inspection area.

  On the other hand, the magnetic sensor 3406 on the right side is located above the upper rolling surface 3302a of the shelf unit 3300 in the center accessory 2300 (specifically, the chance opening 3302g formed in the shelf unit 3300, the frame-shaped center base plate 2301). If the center line is a straight line that passes through the position where the chance outlet 2301a formed and the first start port 2001 provided in the start port unit 2000 is disposed, the start port is from the upper rolling surface 3302a on the right side of the center line. A region RC indicated by a two-dot chain line extending to the lower side of the first starting port 2001 of the unit 2000 is a first inspection region, and the second starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2000 from the lower side of the big prize opening unit 2330. A region RD indicated by a two-dot chain line extending to the lower side of the right side prize port member 2150 including the lower part of It has become a test area.

  Thereby, in the area RA of the left magnetic sensor 3406, the magnets approaching the upper rolling surface 3302a, the middle rolling surface 3302d of the shelf unit 3300 and the first starting port 2001 of the starting port unit 2000 in the center accessory 2300 are detected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area 605 enters the warp inlet 2310 shown in FIG. 173, passes through the warp passage 2316, and rolls on the upper rolling surface 3302a of the shelf unit 3300. The game area rolling on the middle rolling surface 3302d of 3300 is guided to the movable shelf 3304 by a magnet and enters the chance opening 3302g of the shelf unit 3300, and the gaming area immediately above the first start opening 2001 from the chance exit 2301a It is possible to detect the magnets to be discharged to 605 and to play game balls flowing down the game area 605 Stone be induced to the first start hole 2001 can detect magnets Goto to ball entrance. In the region RB of the left magnetic sensor 3406, the game is detected by detecting magnets approaching the two general winning ports 2102 of the left side winning port member 2100 and the one general winning port 2004 of the start port unit 2000. It is possible to detect a magnet that allows a game ball flowing down the area 605 to be guided to the general winning opening 2102 and 2004 with a magnet.

  In the region RC of the magnetic sensor 3406 on the right side, by detecting a magnet that approaches the upper rolling surface 3302a, the middle rolling surface 3302d of the shelf unit 3300, and the first starting port 2001 of the starting port unit 2000 in the center accessory 2300, A game ball that flows down the game area 605 enters the warp inlet 2310 shown in FIG. 173, passes through the warp passage 2316, and rolls on the upper rolling surface 3302 a of the shelf unit 3300. The game ball rolling on the rolling surface 3302d is guided to the movable shelf 3304 with a magnet and enters the chance opening 3302g of the shelf unit 3300, and is discharged from the chance exit 2301a to the game area 605 directly above the first start opening 2001. The magnet ball to be detected can be detected, and the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is first started with a magnet. It is possible to detect the magnet Goto to ball entrance to guide the mouth 2001. In the region RD of the right magnetic sensor 3406, by detecting a magnet approaching the second starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2000, the starting port solenoid 2033 is driven and the pair of movable pieces 2032 expands in the left-right direction. When a game ball can be received at the second start port 2002, a magnet that guides the game ball flowing down the game area 605 to the second start port 2002 with a magnet and allows a large amount of game balls to enter. Goto can be detected, and by detecting a magnet approaching one general winning port 2155 of the right side winning port member 2150, the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is guided to the general winning port 2155 with a magnet. It is possible to detect a magnetic goto to enter.

  Specifically, the region RA of the left magnetic sensor 3406 includes a chance opening 3302g formed in the shelf unit 3300, a chance outlet 2301a formed in the frame-shaped center base plate 2301, and a first start provided in the start opening unit 2000. Assuming that a straight line passing through the position where the mouth 2001 is disposed as a center line, it is an area extending from above the upper rolling surface 3302a closer to the left than the center line to below the first start port 2001 of the start port unit 2000. Specifically, the region RC of the magnetic sensor 3406 includes a chance opening 3302g formed in the shelf unit 3300, a chance outlet 2301a formed in the frame-shaped center base plate 2301, and a first start opening provided in the start opening unit 2000. If the straight line that passes through the position where 2001 is placed is the center line, Since this is a region extending from above the rolling surface 3302a to below the first start port 2001 of the start port unit 2000, a partial region RA of the left magnetic sensor 3406 and a region RC of the right magnetic sensor 3406. A region RZ (a semi-transparent region) that overlaps with a part of the region is generated. As shown in FIG. 205, this region RZ includes a chance opening 3302 g formed in the shelf unit 3300, a chance outlet 2301 a formed in the frame-shaped center base plate 2301, and a first starting opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2000. Is symmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the position where the The first start port 2001 performs a special lottery process (a lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state that gives a profit to the player) when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 based on this. There is something that triggers the game to be performed, and it is extremely important. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the act of illegally entering a game ball into the first start port 2001, that is, the detection of the magnet approaching the first start port 2001 is used in combination with the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the right magnetic sensor 3406. (In other words, by monitoring the magnet got using the two magnetic sensors 3406), the magnet got can be reliably detected. As a result, when any one of the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the right magnetic sensor 3406 cannot detect magnetism due to a malfunction due to some cause (or the magnetic detection capability is remarkably reduced). ), The other magnetic sensor 3406 can detect a magnet approaching the first start port 2001.

  When the pair of movable pieces 2032 are expanded in the left-right direction, a current flows through the coil of the start-port solenoid 2033, so that magnetism is generated from the start-port solenoid 2033 and the blade 2338 is rotated so as to incline to the right ( When the big prize opening 2330a is opened by turning clockwise), a current flows through the coil of the big prize opening solenoid 2347, and magnetism is generated from the big prize opening solenoid 2347, but the start opening solenoid 2033 and The solenoid type, the magnitude of the current flowing through the coil, and the magnitude of the voltage applied to the coil are such that the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 605 cannot be changed even when the big prize opening solenoid 2347 is driven. Is pre-selected. For this reason, the magnetism due to the current flowing through the coil of the start opening solenoid 2033 and the magnetism due to the current flowing through the coil of the big prize opening solenoid 2347 do not reach the magnitude of dragging the game ball. Yes. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the start port solenoid 2033 is attached to the start port unit 2000 disposed in the region RD, the right magnetic sensor 3406 is magnetized by the current flowing through the coil of the start port solenoid 2033. Even if it is detected, it is determined that it is not the magnetism of the magnet used for the above-mentioned “magnet goto” (the magnet has not reached the magnetism that can be used for the magnet goto) and an OFF signal is output. The special prize opening solenoid 2347 is not arranged in the area RC of the right magnetic sensor 3406 and is not arranged in the areas RA and RB of the left magnetic sensor 3406. Magnetism due to the current flowing in the coil of the solenoid 2347 is not detected.

  Here, the advantage of preventing a magnetic ball that causes a game ball to enter the two general winning ports 2102 of the left side winning port member 2100 and one general winning port 2004 of the start port unit 2000 will be briefly described. As described above, the mouth member 2100 is disposed in the lower game area 605 on the left side of the game panel 600 from the center in the left-right direction. It is an arrangement. In the storage tray 311, in addition to the game balls that have been lent out, the game balls that have been paid out are stored, and the player usually enters his / her hand and smoothes the stored game balls. Therefore, the person who performs the magnet goto needs only to put the hand holding the magnet on the storage tray 311 when putting the game ball into the general winning opening 2102, and the action is extremely inconspicuous and should be repeated for a long time. Can do. When a game ball enters the general prize opening 2102, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is paid out as a prize ball. Therefore, a magnetic got that causes the game ball to enter the general prize opening 2102 is repeatedly performed for a long time. Thus, even if the big hit gaming state in which profit is given to the player (advantageous to the player) does not occur, an extremely large number of illegal game balls are acquired.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the region RB of the left magnetic sensor 3406, magnets approaching the two general winning ports 2102 of the left side winning port member 2100 and the one general winning port 2004 of the start port unit 2000 are detected. The method to do was adopted. Then, as a mechanism for individually detecting the magnetism in the region RA and the region RB with the two magnetic sensors, a side surface opposite to the side surface on which the wiring insertion port for passing the wiring through the magnetic sensor connector is formed is played. As described above, the magnetism in the region RA is detected by the side surface 3406a of the left magnetic sensor 3406, as described above, without adopting the mechanism of arranging the game boards 4 on the back side so as to be perpendicular to the panel. The left side magnetic sensor 3406 has a structure in which one left side magnetic sensor 3406 is arranged on the back side of the game board 4 so that the magnetism in the region RB can be detected on the side surface 3406b of the left side magnetic sensor 3406.

  Next, an input circuit to which detection signals from the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the right magnetic sensor 3406 are input will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 shows an input circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic sensor is input.

  As described above, the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the right magnetic sensor 3406 output an ON signal when detecting enough magnetism to receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605, An OFF signal is output when magnetism that has not reached is detected or when no magnetism is detected. Therefore, the detection signals from the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the right magnetic sensor 3406 are input as ON / OFF signals.

  First, the ON / OFF signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 will be described. As shown in FIG. 206, the ON / OFF signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 is transmitted to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247. It is input to the sensor input circuit 4100z, and is input as negative logic in which the ON signal is logic LOW and the OFF signal is logic HI. As a result, in the state where the magnet is not being carried out, the OFF signal is output from the left magnetic sensor 3406, and therefore the state where the logic is HI extends from the left magnetic sensor 3406 to the main control board 4100. Will be maintained.

  The magnetic sensor 3406 on the left side has a resistance R0 of the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 and + 18V via the panel relay board 3247 (this + 18V is a power supply housed in the power supply board box 1103 shown in FIG. 127). The board 1136 is generated and supplied from the power supply board 1136 via the payout control board 1186 stored in the payout control board box 1105. In addition to + 18V, + 34V and + 9V are also generated by the power supply board 1136. And is supplied via the payout control board 1186.) and is electrically connected to the ground of the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247, thereby achieving the same ground level. .

  The left magnetic sensor 3406 and the panel relay board 3247 are electrically connected by a wiring (not shown), and the panel relay board 3247 and the main control board 4100 are electrically connected by a wiring (not shown). When the ON / OFF signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 is input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247, it is input to the base of the transistor TR0 via the resistor R1. A ground and grounded resistor R2 is electrically connected between the resistor R1 and the base of the transistor TR0. When the ON signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 is input, that is, when the magnetism that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, the values of the resistors R1 and R2 are It is set to be in an OFF state. As a result, when the OFF signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 is input, that is, the magnetism that has not reached the level at which the game ball flowing down the game area 605 can be received and guided is detected or no magnetism is detected. When not, the transistor TR0 is turned on. In other words, the transistor TR0 is in an ON state during normal times when no magnet is used.

  The collector of the transistor TR0 is created by a stabilized power supply circuit (not shown) of the main control board 4100 from + 5V (this + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 1136 via the payout control board 1186 by the pull-up resistor R3. ) And outputs an ON / OFF signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 to the main control I / O port 4100b as a magnet goto 1 detection signal.

  When the transistor TR0 is in the ON state, that is, when the magnetism that has not reached the level at which the game ball flowing down the game area 605 can be received and guided is detected or the magnetism is not detected at all, the collector of the transistor TR0 Since the current flows through the emitter, the magnet goto 1 detection signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control I / O port 4100b. In contrast, when the transistor TR0 is turned off, that is, when magnetism that can be received and guided by the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR0 to the emitter of the transistor TR0. A magnet goto 1 detection signal that has been pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor R3 and has a logic level of HI is output to the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Next, the ON / OFF signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 will be described. As shown in FIG. 206, the ON / OFF signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 is sent to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247. It is input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z, and is input as negative logic in which the ON signal is logic LOW and the OFF signal is logic HI. As a result, in the state where the magnet is not engaged, an OFF signal is output from the right magnetic sensor 3406, so that the state in which the logic is HI extends from the right magnetic sensor 3406 to the main control board 4100. Will be maintained.

  The magnetic sensor 3406 on the right side is connected to the resistor R4 of the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 and + 18V via the panel relay board 3247 (this + 18V is the power board box 1103 shown in FIG. 127 as described above. And is supplied from the power supply board 1136 via the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105. Besides + 18V, + 34V and + 9V are also described above. As described above, the power supply board 1136 is generated and supplied via the payout control board 1186.) and is electrically connected to the ground of the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247. As a result, the ground level is the same.

  The right magnetic sensor 3406 and the panel relay board 3247 are electrically connected by wiring (not shown), and the panel relay board 3247 and the main control board 4100 are electrically connected by wiring (not shown). When the ON / OFF signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 is input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247, it is input to the base of the transistor TR1 via the resistor R5. Between the resistor R5 and the base of the transistor TR1, a grounded and grounded resistor R6 is electrically connected. The values of the resistors R5 and R6 are such that when the ON signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 is input, that is, when the magnetism that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, the transistor TR1 It is set to be in an OFF state. As a result, when the OFF signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 is input, that is, the magnetism that does not reach the level that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected or no magnetism is detected. When not, the transistor TR1 is turned on. In other words, the transistor TR1 is in an ON state during normal times when no magnet gotten is performed.

  The collector of the transistor TR1 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor R7 (this + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 1136 via the payout control board 1186, as described above, from + 9V by the stabilization power supply circuit (not shown) of the main control board 4100. The ON / OFF signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 is output to the main control I / O port 4100b as a magnet goto 2 detection signal.

  When the transistor TR1 is in the ON state, that is, when the magnetism that has not reached the level at which the game ball flowing down the game area 605 can be received and guided or when no magnetism is detected, the collector of the transistor TR1 Since the current flows through the emitter, the magnet goto 2 detection signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control I / O port 4100b. In contrast, when the transistor TR1 is turned off, that is, when magnetism that can be received and guided by the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR1 to the emitter of the transistor TR1. A magnet goto 2 detection signal that has been pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor R7 and has a logic level of HI is output to the main control I / O port 4100b.

  The main control board 4100 confirms the logic of the magnet goto 1 detection signal and the logic of the magnet goto 2 detection signal by a switch process in a timer interrupt process to be described later. When the logic of the magnet goto 1 detection signal and / or the logic of the magnet goto 2 detection signal is HI, that is, when the magnetism that can be received and guided by the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, special timer interrupt processing is performed. A magnetic sensor abnormality command is output to the peripheral control board 4140 in the symbol command control process, or a magnetic sensor abnormality command is output to the payout control board 1186 in the prize ball process in the timer interrupt process.

  When the payout control board 1186 receives the magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100, the magnet control is performed from the external terminal board 1150a to the hall computer not shown in the port output process of the power-on process (not shown). When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 receives various commands for various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 in a 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process described later. While the light emission mode is a light emission mode that reports that the magnet is being performed, an alarm sound is transmitted from the side speaker 121 that indicates that the magnet is being performed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the region RA of the left magnetic sensor 3406, the upper rolling surface 3302a, the middle rolling surface 3302d of the shelf unit 3300 in the center accessory 2300, and the first starting port 2001 of the starting port unit 2000. And detection of magnets approaching the two general winning ports 2102 of the left side winning port member 2100 and one general winning port 2004 of the start port unit 2000 in the region RB of the left magnetic sensor 3406. Can be performed by one left magnetic sensor 3406. That is, in the present embodiment, the signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 input to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247 is only one ON / OFF signal, so that the main control I / O port 4100b can be used. The presence or absence of a magnet approaching the region RA and the region RB of the left magnetic sensor 3406 can be monitored with only one bit among the plurality of bits constituting the input port. Further, in the region RC of the magnetic sensor 3406 on the right side, detection of a magnet that approaches the upper rolling surface 3302a, the middle rolling surface 3302d of the shelf unit 3300 in the center accessory 2300, and the first starting port 2001 of the starting port unit 2000; In the region RD of the right magnetic sensor 3406, detection of a magnet approaching the second starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2000 and one general winning port 2155 of the right side winning port member 2150 is detected by one right magnetic sensor 3406. It can be done by. In other words, in the present embodiment, the signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 input to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3247 is only one ON / OFF signal, so the main control I / O port 4100b The presence or absence of a magnet approaching the region RC and region RD of the right magnetic sensor 3406 can be monitored with only one bit among the plurality of bits constituting the input port.

  Also, any of the wiring that electrically connects the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the panel relay board 3247 or the wiring that electrically connects the panel relay board 3247 and the main control board 4100 is disconnected, If the magnetic sensor 3406 is disconnected, the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected, so that the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 is applied to the base of the transistor TR0. The voltage is pulled down to the ground level by the resistor R2 connected to the ground, and the transistor TR0 is turned off. In the state where the transistor TR0 is OFF, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR0 to the emitter of the transistor TR0. Therefore, the magnet Got 1 detection signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R3 is the main control I / O. It is output to the port 4100b. That is, the ON signal from the left magnetic sensor 3406 is input to the magnetic sensor when the wiring from the left magnetic sensor 3406 to the main control board 4100 is not disconnected or disconnected normally. It becomes HI which is the same logic as the logic input to the circuit 4100z. In other words, the HI is the same logic as when the magnetism that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected. Therefore, in order not to detect the act of the magnet goto, the wiring for electrically connecting the left magnetic sensor 3406 and the panel relay board 3247 and the panel relay board 3247 and the main control board 4100 are electrically connected. Even if any of the wirings to be disconnected is disconnected or removed, the logic sensor LOW input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 is maintained. Therefore, as described above, the main control board 4100 outputs the magnetic sensor abnormality command to the peripheral control board 4140 in the special symbol command control process in the timer interruption process, or outputs the magnetic sensor abnormality command in the prize ball process in the timer interruption process. Or output to the payout control board 1186. As a result, when the payout control board 1186 receives the magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100, it indicates that the magnet is being sent from the external terminal board 1150a to the hall computer in the port output process of the power-on process. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100 and outputs a signal, the peripheral control board 4140 changes the light emission mode of various LEDs provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 in the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process. In addition to the light emission mode that informs that the magnet is being performed, an alarm sound that indicates that the magnet is being performed can be heard from the side speaker 121.

  Further, any of the wiring for electrically connecting the right magnetic sensor 3406 and the panel relay board 3247 and the wiring for electrically connecting the panel relay board 3247 and the main control board 4100 may be disconnected, If the magnetic sensor 3406 is disconnected, the right magnetic sensor 3406 and the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected, so that the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 is applied to the base of the transistor TR1. The voltage is pulled down to the ground level by the resistor R6 connected to the ground, and the transistor TR1 is turned off. In the state where the transistor TR1 is OFF, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR1 to the emitter of the transistor TR1, so the magnet Goto 2 detection signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R7 is the main control I / O. It is output to the port 4100b. That is, the ON signal from the right magnetic sensor 3406 is input to the magnetic sensor when the wiring from the right magnetic sensor 3406 to the main control board 4100 is not disconnected or disconnected normally. It becomes HI which is the same logic as the logic input to the circuit 4100z. In other words, the HI is the same logic as when the magnetism that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected. Therefore, in order to prevent the person who performs the magnet from detecting the action, the wiring for electrically connecting the right magnetic sensor 3406 and the panel relay board 3247 and the panel relay board 3247 and the main control board 4100 are electrically connected. Even if any of the wirings to be disconnected is disconnected or removed, the logic sensor LOW input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 is maintained. Therefore, as described above, the main control board 4100 outputs the magnetic sensor abnormality command to the peripheral control board 4140 in the special symbol command control process in the timer interruption process, or outputs the magnetic sensor abnormality command in the prize ball process in the timer interruption process. Or output to the payout control board 1186. As a result, when the payout control board 1186 receives the magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100, it indicates that the magnet is being sent from the external terminal board 1150a to the hall computer in the port output process of the power-on process. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100 and outputs a signal, the peripheral control board 4140 changes the light emission mode of various LEDs provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 in the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process. In addition to the light emission mode that informs that the magnet is being performed, an alarm sound that indicates that the magnet is being performed can be heard from the side speaker 121.

  In the present embodiment, since the left magnetic sensor 3406 can detect the magnetism in the region RA and the region RB as described above, the magnetism in the region other than the region RA and the region RB is detected. It cannot be detected. Since the right magnetic sensor 3406 can detect the magnetism in the region RC and the region RD as described above, it cannot detect the magnetism in regions other than the region RC and the region RD. . Suppose that a game ball enters the warp inlet portion 2310 shown in FIG. 173 and receives a game ball flowing down the game area 605 by hitting a magnet on the surface of the glass unit 450, and then flows down to that part one after another. After the game balls are piled up and formed into a “grape-like” gathered state having a certain size, the game balls flowing down along the “grape-like” gathered part are separated by the warp entrance part. The peripheral control board 4140 will be described later even if the magnet is guided to 2310 and sent to the upper rolling surface 3302a of the shelf unit 3300 through the warp passage 2316 to increase the probability of entering the first starting port 2001. In the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process, various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light to notify a hall clerk or the like.

[7. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 207 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 624a is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 624a is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch 624a outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that there is, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to by the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 624a is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 in response to a variable random number used for a lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the game, and the special symbol variable display. Reach random numbers used for lottery processing of whether or not, the design random numbers (first design random number, the first design random number used to determine the type of jackpot if it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number A random number counter that holds random numbers such as a random number (ordinary random number) that is used for a lottery process for the winning of winning when the movable piece 2032 is operated. To have.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2001 is won for starting, the second starting port 2002 is won for starting. Even in this case, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 207 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2202, the first start port sensor 2011, the second start port sensor 2349, the count sensor 2013, the general winning port sensor 2014, and the like are received. Entered. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above random numbers, the random number of the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random number (special random number, normal random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the normal symbol is updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable symbol variable display is stopped. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a winning as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2032 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2032 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 2R big hit gaming state). A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit is made, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the movable piece 2032 and increasing the number of times the movable piece 2032 is opened.

  Specifically, in the control of the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 250/251, and the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0) shorter than that of the non-short time state. .5 seconds). When the normal symbol lottery result is a win, the movable piece 2032 of the second starting port 2002 is opened and closed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) longer than the non-short-time state. The pattern is repeated more times (for example, three times) than in the non-time-short state. That is, during the time-short state control, it is easier to win a game ball to the second start port 2002 than in the non-time-short state, and the second start port 2002 is more than the first start port 2001. The game ball can be won more efficiently by aiming at. As will be described later, when a game ball wins the second start opening 2002, the number of rounds is determined as the type of big hit when the lottery processing of the special symbol is a big hit than the first start opening 2001. There is a high probability that the jackpot set to be controlled to a large number of jackpot gaming states (for example, 11R jackpot gaming state) will be determined. For this reason, during the time-short state control, the center accessory 2300 is controlled so that many game balls pass through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 and many game balls win the second start port 2002. It is preferable to launch a game ball (so-called “right strike”) aiming at the right side.

  On the other hand, in the non-short-time state control, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 1/251, and the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is set to a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds). . When the normal symbol lottery result is a hit, the open / close pattern for closing the movable piece 2032 of the second start port 2002 in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.25 seconds) is only once. Since it is not executed, it is difficult to win a game ball in the second starting port 2002. That is, during the control of the non-time-short state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is won is extremely lower than that of the time-short state, and the movable piece 2032 is used to win a game ball at the second start port 2002. Since the time of the open state is too short, even if you hit the right, you can not expect a big hit. Therefore, during the non-time-short state control, the game ball is aimed at the left side of the center accessory 2300 so that a large number of game balls win the first start port 2001 instead of the second start port 2002. Is preferably fired (so-called “left-handed”).

  In the short time state of this example, the control for increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol as compared with the non-short time state, the control for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol as compared with the non-short time state, the second start port 2002 Control for extending the opening time during which the second start port 2002 is opened, control for increasing the number of times the second start port 2002 is opened compared to the non-time-short state, the first special symbol display 641 and the second Two special symbol display units 642 are configured to execute all of the control required to shorten the time required for the variable symbol variable display control (the time required for the decorative symbol variable symbol display control in the liquid crystal display device 1400) to be shorter than the non-short-time state. However, any one of these controls or any combination (or all of them) may be executed.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral board 4010 or the like is performed.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 outputs information such as hit information (11R big hit, 5R big hit, 2R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the processing of step S18. Process.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 2011, the second start port sensor 2349, the count sensor 2013, the general winning port sensor 2014, and the like as the process of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a mounted on the payout control board 1186 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the start memory number as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 2011. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first starting port 2001) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2349 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2002) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is “11R probability variable big hit (specific 2, 3)”, “11R normal When it comes to a mode that suggests “big hit (non-specific 1)”, the big winning opening 2330a is controlled to open according to the 11R big hit gaming state, and a mode that suggests “5R probability variable big hit (specific 1)” In such a case, the winning prize opening 2330a is controlled to be opened according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and suggests "2R probability variable jackpot (specific 5, 6)" and "2R normal jackpot (non-specific 2)" When the 2R big hit game state is opened for a long time, the big prize opening 2330a is controlled to be in an open state, and when it becomes a mode that suggests “2R probable big hit (specific 4)”, Open 2R size Ri executes a process of controlling the open state the winning opening 2330a in accordance with the gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit execution flag is set. If is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a mode that suggests "small hit", A process of controlling the big prize opening 2330a to the open state is executed in accordance with the small hit game state similar to the 2R big hit game state opened for a short time.

  If neither big hit execution flag nor small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ On the condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is applied. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 2011 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2001, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S44, each random number thus obtained is used as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not, if the big hit is a big hit type, if the big hit or small hit is not, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, or the type type of the game effect to be executed After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as before the start of the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2349 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Whether the main control MPU 4100a wins the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S53. If it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, if it is not a big hit, execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, or pre-determined information such as the type type of game effect to be executed Then, after performing the effect pre-determination process that is determined before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S55), the process ends.

  FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination processing (steps S45 and S55). The effect predetermination process executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process and the effect predetermination process executed in step S55 of the second start port pass process are common program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Therefore, only the effect predetermination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process will be described here. The probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number (design random number) is different from the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number (design random number). For example, by making the type of the variation pattern selected based on the random number of the first special symbol different from the type of the variation pattern selected based on the random number of the second special symbol when the big hit is not achieved, The table referred to in the effect preliminary determination process executed in step S45 of the first start port passing process is different from the table referred to in the effect predetermination process executed in step S55 of the second start port passing process. Also good.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 212 (A) and the acquired random number, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, and the reach random number. Whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made by comparing the variable random numbers, the type of the big hit if the big hit is reached, and the game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 if the big hit or the small hit is not reached The effect is executed or the type of game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 212 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, a probability variation flag indicating that high probability state control is being executed is set. If it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value and the first special random number, if the probability variation flag is not set, the low probability jackpot judgment value and the first special random number By comparing with a random number, it is specified whether or not it is a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3819-3918) is set in a later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 216 (A)) and has the same randomness as the jackpot determination value compared with the first special random number. The low probability jackpot determination value (3909-3918) is set in a low probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 216 (A)) to be described later and is compared with the first special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a big hit, and "big hit 1-3" as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, not a big hit It can be classified into either “losing” or “reach 1-9”.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 212 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, the same random number value is obtained regardless of whether or not the probability variation flag is set. It is also specified whether or not a small hit is made by comparing the small hit determination value set to 1 and the first special random number. These small hit determination values (3800-3818) at the time of high probability or low probability are set in a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 216 (A)) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later, and the first special random number. It is set to the same random number as the small hit determination value compared with. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number with the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the small hit is made, and the prior determination information is classified into “big hit 3” including the small hit. be able to.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 212 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a probability variation flag indicating that high probability state control is being executed is set. If the probability change is determined to be a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot value with the second special random number, and if the probability variation flag is not set, the It is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the two special random numbers. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3819-3918) is set in a later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 216 (A)) and is identical to the jackpot determination value compared with the second special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) with a low probability is set to a jackpot judgment value that is set in a jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 216 (A)) at a low probability, which will be described later, and is compared with the second special random number. The same random number is assumed. Therefore, by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a big hit. And “reach 1-9”.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 212 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the first special random number is compared with the prior determination table and a big hit is specified, a determination value indicating which big hit is to be determined. And the first symbol random number are used to identify the type of jackpot. Specifically, the determination value (57-96) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 2 is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 216 (C)) described later and is compared with the first symbol random number. Among them, the determination value (17-56) indicating that the specific 2 big hit is the same random value as the determination value indicating the specific 2 big hit is a symbol determination table (FIG. 216 (C)) described later. The reference value is set to the same random number value as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 1 big hit among the determination values to be compared with the first symbol random number, and is specified 3 to 6 or non-specific 2 big hit Is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 216 (C)) to be described later, and the determination values (0-16, 97-199) indicating 3 to 6 or not specified among the determination values to be compared with the first symbol random number Random value that is the same as the judgment value indicating that it is a big hit of specific 2 It is. For this reason, by comparing the first symbol random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, the type of jackpot is accurately identified, and the jackpot of specific 2 is included as the pre-judgment information as “big hit 1”, the jackpot of specific 1 Can be classified into either “big hit 2”, specific 3 to 6 or “big hit 3” including non-specific 2 big hits.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 212 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the second special random number is compared with the prior determination table and a big hit is specified, a determination value indicating which big hit is to be determined. And the second symbol random number are identified. Specifically, the determination value (0-199) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 2 or non-specific 1 is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 216 (C)) to be described later and compared with the second symbol random number. Among the determination values to be determined, the same random number value as the determination value indicating that it is a big hit of specific 2 or non-specific 1 is used. For this reason, by comparing the second symbol random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, the type of jackpot is accurately specified, and the pre-determination information is classified as “big hit 1” as a big hit of specific 2 or non-specific 1 can do. However, if it is specified in step S61 that a big win is obtained by comparing the second special random number and the advance determination table, the identification 2 is not required even if the second symbol random number and the advance determination table are not compared in step S61. Or, since the determination value (0-199) indicating that it is a big hit of non-specific 1 is all of the second symbol random number, it is classified as “big hit 1” as a big hit of specific 2 or non-specific 1 as prior determination information be able to.

  In addition, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 212A, when it is determined that a loss occurs, reach is displayed when a probability change flag indicating that control in a high-probability state is executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change indicating the reach and the reach random number, it is specified whether or not the reach is displayed, and the time-short flag indicating that the control of the time-short state (low-probability time-short state) is executed is set. If it is, the reach judgment value indicating that the reach is displayed is compared with the reach random number to determine whether the reach is displayed, and the probability variation flag or the time flag is not set. When indicating that state control is being executed, it is determined whether or not to display reach by comparing the reach determination value at the normal time indicating display of reach and the reach random number. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to the reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 216B), which will be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach reach determination value (0 to 5) at the time is set to a reach determination table (see FIG. 216B) described later and is set to the same random number as the reach determination value compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0 to 6) at the time is set to the same random number as the reach determination value that is set in a normal reach determination table (see FIG. 216B) to be described later and compared with the reach random number. . Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the big hit is not made, and the pre-determination is made. The information can be classified as either “losing” that does not display reach (execution of reach effect) or “reach 1 to 9” that displays reach (execute reach effect).

  In addition, the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value matches the reach random number, the reach is displayed in the game state of “reach 1 to 9” at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time (reach effect is executed). It is classified as “Reach 1-3”. In addition, the reach determination value (0 to 6) at the normal time is a determination value that is not the same as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change, and is the same as the reach determination value (0 to 5) at the time reduction When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, the determination value (1 to 5) is included. It is classified into “reach 4 to 6” for display (execution of reach production). Further, the reach determination value (0 to 6) at the normal time includes a determination value that is not the same as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change and the reach determination value (0 to 5) at the time reduction, When the reach determination value and the reach random number that are not the same match, the reach is displayed in the normal gaming state among the reach 1 to 9 (reach effect is executed) and is classified into “reach 7 to 9”. ing. For this reason, when the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, any one of the probability change time, the short time, and the normal time is used. Reach is displayed in the gaming state (execution of reach effect), reach is displayed in either the short or normal gaming state (reach effect is performed), or the reach is displayed in the normal game state ( It is possible to specify whether to perform reach production).

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 212 (A), when a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed is compared with a variable random number. The mode classification of the game effect to be executed is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (164 to 222) indicating that the super-reach effect having a low jackpot expectation degree is executed is a random value that is the same as the determination value that indicates execution of a reach. ) Is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random number, and the super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation level is executed. The determination values (223 to 240) indicating this are set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later and compared with the fluctuation random number. Are the same random number and the judgment value indicating that the performing high super reach demonstration of big hit expectation of judgment values. For this reason, by comparing the variable random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the type of game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and “reach 1, 4, 7” for executing the normal reach effect as the advance determination information, It can be classified into “reach 2, 5, 8” for executing a super reach production with a low expectation degree of big hit and “reach 3, 6, 9” for executing a super reach production with a high expectation degree of big hit. Then, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-determination table in step S61, the pre-determination information is classified into one of “reach 1 to 3”, “reach 4 to 6”, or “reach 5 to 9”. Can be classified into any one of “reach 1” to “reach 9” as the prior determination information.

  As described above, as a result of the comparison between the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 212A and the acquired random numbers (special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) In the case of the big hit type, if the big hit or the small hit is not achieved, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the pre-determined information such as the type type of the game effect to be executed is specified. As shown in FIG. 212 (B), the pre-determination information is classified into any one of 13 types: “lost”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 3”, “reach 1” to “reach 9”.

  Then, in the production prior determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified prior determination information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, if it is not a big hit or a big hit or a small hit) The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, or the type of the game effect to be executed), and the acquired special random number type (either the first special random number or the second special random number) Then, a hold number (value of the hold number counter) stored in correspondence with the acquired special random number and a hold number command corresponding to the set number are set. For example, in the production pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the number of first special symbols held A first special symbol hold number command corresponding to (the value of the first special hold number counter) is set (step S62). Note that in the fourth digit of the number-of-holds command (for example, 620XH when the prior determination information regarding the first special symbol is “losing”), when the number of held = 1, X = 2 and the number of held = 2. Sometimes X = 3, X = 4 is assigned when the number of holds = 3, and X = 5 is assigned when the number of holds = 4. For this reason, when the hold number command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral board 4010, the start opening (one of the first start opening 2001 and the second start opening 2002) where the start winning is generated, the start opening In addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the start winning prize, whether or not the display result of the special symbol variation display based on the generated start winning is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, big hit or small If the winning effect is not executed, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, or the pre-determined information such as the type type of the game effect to be executed is displayed before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 can be grasped.

  In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot determination value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table is different from the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group A high probability random number determining means having a ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be discriminated as to the outlier determination value set higher than a ratio of the jackpot determination table in which the winning probability of the jackpot is determined, and random number acquisition Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random number (first special random number, second special random number) is classified into either the above-mentioned loss determination value or the above jackpot determination value, and this is not executed. A value that belongs to the high probability random number group in which the winning random numbers used for the determination are mixed with the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value while maintaining the state of It is provided with pseudo-probability advance determination means that makes it possible to execute an advance determination on the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning for each determination process that is put on hold by determining whether or not there is The above-described pseudo-probability advance determination means may determine in advance the degree of expectation related to the big win.

  In this way, by including a high probability random number determining means in which the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value are mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment that is still on hold can be leaked While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates the above, regarding the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the winning of the jackpot according to the mixture ratio of the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value in the means with high probability random number determination The preceding determination can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the decision process based on the random number value (a value belonging to the low-probability random number group that is paired with the high-probability random number group) that is not the pre-determined special hit determination value is expected, It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected value of the jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). In addition, the expected degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display corresponding to the hold-up. Will come to be.

  FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which, for example, a determination process of a mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 is stopped (step S83).
5). The first special symbol display 641 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 207).

  FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the high probability time shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 216 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 216 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a, and is a jackpot determination table at low probability used when the gaming state is at low probability (normal state and low probability short time state). And a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is at a high probability (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the nineteen types of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the winning is won, and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 3890 types of first special random numbers are out of place. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 3909 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that.

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at the high probability, 100 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, as in the prior determination table. Match the big hit determination value, match the small hit determination value indicating that 19 types of first special random numbers have been won for the small hit, and 3800 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value. One special random number is associated with each. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-time-short state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit is won is 10 in the low probability (normal state and short-time state). Doubled. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 100 types of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability are the same as the prior determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won and match with the loss determination value indicating that the 3909 types of second special random numbers are out of place.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set and the process is ended (step S118). Comparison result between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process If it is determined that the off compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 216 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 216 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a, and the probability change used when the game state is a probability change (high probability state (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state)). Time reach determination table, time reach reach determination table used when the game state is short (low probability time short state), and normal reach determination used when the game state is normal (normal state) And a table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached and 238 types of reach random numbers are not reached, as in the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

  Further, in the reach determination table at the time reduction, similarly to the above-described determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach and the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) than in the probability change (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, as in the above-described pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change and short-time operation are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the reach determination values coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the time of probability change (high probability state) and in the short time (low probability short time state).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating that becomes reach is set (step S121).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the count value of the high probability count counter to which the high probability state continuation count is set is “0” (step S122). If this counter value is not “0”, after counting down the high probability count counter (step S123), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the high probability count counter is “0” (step S123). S124). As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a high-probability end flag indicating that the control of the high-probability state is ended is set, and the process is ended (step S125).

  FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 217, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 216 (C). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 216 (C), in the symbol determination table, similar to the above-described pre-determination table, for each determination result (specific 1 5R probability variation big hit, specific 2 11R probability variation big hit, specific 3 11R probability variation big hit (jump) Up bonus), specific 4 2R probability change (short open) big hit, specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, non-specific 1 11R normal big hit, non-specific 2 2R normal big hit ) Are stored in association with symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1.5R jackpot gaming state (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the blade 2338 of the big prize opening unit 2330 is repeated five times (5 rounds)), and after the 5R jackpot gaming state is finished, a special symbol (first special symbol and (2 special symbols) is controlled to the high-probability short-time state until 88 times of variable display is executed, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 executes a game effect capable of determining the high-probability state. 5R probability change big hit 2.11R big hit gaming state (the opening and closing pattern for opening and closing the blade 2338 of the big prize opening unit 2330 is repeated 11 times (11 rounds)), and after the end of the 11R big hit gaming state, 88 times of special symbols The liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high-probability state, and is controlled to the high-probability short-time state until the variable display is executed. 2. Specific 2 11R probability variation jackpot that executes discriminating game effects. The big hit 2R big hit game state (the open / close pattern for opening and closing the blade 2338 of the big prize opening unit 2330 is repeated twice (2 rounds)). By continuing, it is controlled so that it becomes the 11R jackpot gaming state as a total (jump-up bonus), and after the 11R jackpot gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the high probability time-short state until 88 special symbols are displayed. Specific 3 11R probable big hit (jump-up bonus) for executing a game effect that can be determined to be a high probability state in the liquid crystal display device 1400
4). When the short-open 2R big hit game state is controlled in such a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and when it is controlled to the low probability non-time-short state (normal state), a special symbol after the short open 2R big hit game state ends In the liquid crystal display device 1400, a game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether the state is in a high probability state or not is executed until the variable display of 88 times is executed. 88 changes in special symbols after the end of the short-release 2R jackpot gaming state when controlled to a state other than a low probability non-short state (high probability short state, high probability non-short state or low probability short state) Until the display is executed, the high probability short-time state is controlled, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 executes a game effect capable of determining the high-probability state. . When the long open 2R big hit gaming state is controlled and the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, the special symbols are displayed 10 times after the long open 2R big hit gaming state. Until the high probability short-time state is controlled, and then the high-probability non-short-time state is controlled until 78 variations of the special symbol are executed. After that, the liquid crystal display device 1400 executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state. On the other hand, a state other than the low probability non-time short state (high probability short time state, high probability non-time short state or low probability time short) State), the high-probability short-time state is maintained until the special symbol is displayed 78 times in addition to the 10 symbols of the special symbol after the long open 2R jackpot gaming state is completed. Control too A is, after the execution of ten variation display of the special symbols also performs determination difficult game effects whether the high-probability state in the liquid crystal display device 1400 identified 5 of 2R probability variation (latent) jackpot 6. In the case of controlling to the 2R big hit game state with long open, and in the case of being controlled to the low probability non-time short state (normal state), in addition to the 10 fluctuation display of the special symbol after the end of the long open 2R big hit game state The high-probability short-time state is controlled until 78 variations of special symbols are executed, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high-probability state when 10 variations of special symbols are exceeded. Is changed to a game effect that can be discriminated, and if it is controlled to a state other than the low-probability non-short-time state (high-probability short-time state, high-probability non-short-time state or low-probability short-time state) After the gaming state is finished, the high probability time-short state is controlled until the special symbol 78 times of variable display is executed in addition to the special symbol 10 times of variable display, and the special symbol 10 times of variable display. After running A 6R 2R probability change (surprise) jackpot that executes a game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state is controlled to a 7.11R jackpot gaming state and special after the 11R jackpot gaming state ends. Non-specific 1 11R that controls the low-probability short-time state until 88 symbols of variable display are executed, and executes a game effect capable of determining that the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the low-probability state. Normal jackpot 8. When the long open 2R big hit gaming state is controlled and the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, the special symbols are displayed 10 times after the long open 2R big hit gaming state. The low-probability short-time state until the low-probability non-short-time state is controlled, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether the high-probability state is present, If the state is controlled to a state other than the low probability non-time short state (high probability short time state, high probability non-time short state or low probability short time state) In addition to the variable display, the low probability time-short state is controlled until 78 variable displays of the special symbol are executed, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a high probability even after the 10 variable displays of the special symbol are executed. Condition Determining in any of the jackpot from the non-specific second 2R usually big hit, eight jackpot to perform difficult game effects determine whether a.

  In this example, in the short-open 2R big hit game state and the long-open 2R big hit game state, the opening time of the big prize opening 2330a per round (time for opening control of the blade 2338 of the big prize opening unit 2330) ) Are different. For example, when a specific 4 2R probability change (short open) big hit, a specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, a specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, or a non-specific 2 2R normal big hit, Like the 5R probability variation big hit, the specific 2 11R probability variation big hit, the specific 3 11R probability variation big hit (jump-up bonus), and the non-specific 1 11R normal big hit, the opening time of the big prize opening 2330a per round is 28.5 seconds. In contrast, when the 2R probability change (short opening) big hit of 4 is controlled, the opening time of the big winning opening 2330a per round is extremely shorter than the long opening state. The short open state is controlled to 0.05 seconds. In the case of a small hit, the short open state is controlled to a short open state in which the open time of the big prize opening 2330a per round in the small hit game state is 0.05 seconds, as in the short open 2R big hit game state. doing. Thus, when the specific 4 2R probability variation (short opening) big hit or small hit is reached, the opening time of the big winning opening 2330a per round in the short opening 2R big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is Since it is too short, even if the opening control of the blade 2338 of the big prize opening unit 2330 is recognized, it is difficult to win a game ball in the big prize opening 2330a. In other words, in the long-open 2R big hit game state, by launching the game balls aiming at the right side of the center role 2300 (so-called “right hit”), the game balls win one after another at the big prize opening 2330a, and the big hit game Although not as much as the 11R jackpot gaming state and the 5R jackpot gaming state among the states, it can be expected to acquire many game balls. On the other hand, in the short-open 2R big hit game state or the small hit game state, even if the player hits the right, the game ball rarely wins the big winning opening 2330a, and unlike the long-open 2R big hit game state, many Can't expect to get any game balls. It should be noted that the hits (for example, specific 5, specific 6, non-specific 2 big hits) that trigger the control to the long open 2R big hit game state correspond to the “long open per hit” of the present invention, and the short open 2R big hit game. A hit (for example, a special 4 big hit or a small hit) that triggers the control to the state or the small hit gaming state corresponds to the “short open hit” of the present invention.

  Also, in this example, when a low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled and a 2R probability variation (latency) big hit of 5 is specified or a 2R normal big hit of non-specific 2 is set, a long open 2R big hit game After the end of the state, all are controlled to be in the time-saving state until 10 times of special symbols are displayed. By the way, during the control of the low probability non-short-time state, the game balls are launched aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2300 so that many game balls win the first starting port 2001 (so-called “left-handed”). However, if the game is controlled to a long-open 2R big hit game state triggered by a specific 5 2R probability variation (latency) big hit or a non-specific 2 2R normal big hit, many game balls are placed in the big winning opening 2330a. In order to win, a game ball must be launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center actor 2300. And, for example, if the long-open 2R big hit game state is not controlled to the short-time state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery result is extremely low in the non-short-time state, and a right-hit cannot be expected to generate a big hit. Therefore, it must immediately return to the left. It should be noted that when the player strikes the right side, there are almost no obstacle nails or windmills (not shown) provided in the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300, and the second start is not required without the delicate operation of the operation handle 410. A game ball can be awarded to the mouth 2002 or the above-mentioned large winning opening 2330a. On the other hand, when left-handed, many obstacle nails and windmills (not shown) are provided in the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300, and the flow direction of the game ball driven toward the game area 605 is reduced. The game ball cannot be won at the first start port 2001 unless the operation handle portion 410 is changed and the delicate operation is repeated. That is, the act of returning from right-handed to left-handed is not easy to adjust the operation position of the operation handle portion 410 so that the game ball wins the first starting port 2001, and is troublesome for the player. . However, after the long-open 2R big hit game state is finished, until a special symbol 10 times of variable display is executed, it is controlled to a short time state, and many game balls pass through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200. , And by continuing the right strike so that many game balls win at the second starting port 2002, it is not necessary to return to the left strike immediately after changing the left strike to the right strike. Can be reduced.

  In addition, during the time-short state control after the end of the long-open 2R big hit gaming state, the player hits the right so that many game balls win in the second starting port 2002, as will be described later. In addition, when a game ball wins at the second starting port 2002, a big hit gaming state with a large number of rounds as a type of big hit when the lottery processing of the special symbol is a big hit than the first starting port 2001 ( The probability of determining a big hit (specific 2 11R probability variation big hit or non-specific 1 11R normal big hit) set to control to 11R big hit gaming state is high. Therefore, after the long open 2R big hit game state is finished, until the 10 symbols of the special symbol display is executed, the control is made to be in the short time state, so that the 11R big hit game state and the 5R big hit game state are more Even if the game ball cannot be obtained, the big hit is set so that the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 2002 during the right-hand hit in the short-time state and is controlled to the big hit game state with a large number of rounds. The probability of deciding on the game is increased, and the loss feeling that the 11R jackpot gaming state or the 5R jackpot gaming state could not be obtained can be reduced.

  In addition, when it is controlled to a low probability non-short-time state (normal state), if it becomes a specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, a specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit or a non-specific 2 2R normal big hit As in the case where the long-opening 2R jackpot gaming state ends, after the control of the special symbol is executed until the time of 10 variations display of the special symbol is executed, until the time of 78 variations display of the special symbol is executed. Controlled to a short time state. As described above, when the 2R probability variation (latency) big hit of the specific 5, the 2R probability variation (surprise) big hit of the specific 6, and the 2R normal big hit of the non-specific 2 are achieved, the special symbol is displayed after the end of the long open 2R big hit gaming state. Since the time-varying state is controlled until the ten variable displays are executed, it is possible to execute a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not to extend the time-short state in the liquid crystal display device 1400. As a result, during the control of the short-time state after the end of the long-open 2R big hit gaming state, even if the special symbol 10 times of variable display is digested, the special symbol 78 times of variable display is executed. There is a possibility that the right-handed game will be continued by extending the short-time state until the right-handed game can be performed with expectation.

  On the other hand, if the 2R probability change (short open) big hit or small hit of 4 is specified when the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, after the short open 2R big hit game state or the small hit game After completion of the state, all are controlled to the non-time-short state. At this time, in the short-open 2R big hit game state or the small hit game state, even if the player hits the right, there is almost no game ball winning in the big winning opening 2330a, and it is necessary to change from left-handed to right-handed. Absent. In addition, after the end of the short-open 2R big hit game state or after the end of the small hit game state, both are controlled so as to be in a non-time-saving state. It is preferable to continue striking. In this way, when the 2R probability change (short open) big hit or small hit of 4 is specified when the low probability non-time-short state (normal state) is controlled, it is changed to right-handed from the beginning in a series of games. In the first place, it was made so that the player would not bother.

  In addition, in this example, if a special 4R 2R probability change (short open) big hit is made when the low probability non-time-short state (normal state) is controlled, a special symbol is displayed after the short open 2R big hit game state ends. The high probability non-short-time state is controlled until 88 times of variable display is executed. In addition, in the case of a small hit, since the gaming state at the time of the small hit is continuously controlled after the small hit gaming state, it was controlled to a low probability non-short state (normal state) When a small hit is occasionally made, the low probability non-short-time state is controlled after the end of the small hit gaming state. In this way, when the specific 4R 2R probability change (short opening) big hit or small hit is reached, control is made to the non-time saving state after the short opening 2R big hit gaming state or after the small hit gaming state ends. Therefore, it is possible to execute a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state. In the case of a 2R probability change (short open) big hit when specified 4 is being controlled to a state other than the low probability non-short state (high probability short state, high probability non-short state or low probability short state) After the end of the short-open 2R big hit game state, the special symbol is controlled to the short state at a high probability until 88 fluctuation displays are executed. It is possible to execute a game effect capable of determining the high probability state in the liquid crystal display device 1400 without controlling to the high probability short-time state until 88 variations of special symbols are executed.

  Also, in this example, if a special 5R 2R probability change (latency) jackpot is achieved when the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, the special symbol 10 is displayed after the long-open 2R jackpot gaming state ends. After controlling to the high probability short-time state until the variable display is executed for the first time, it is controlled to the high probability non-short time state until 78 times the variable display of the special symbol is executed. In the case of a big hit, if the 2R big hit game state with long open is finished, in addition to the 10 symbols display of the special symbol, control to the high probability short-time state until the 78 symbols of the special symbol is displayed Yes. In addition, when the non-specific 2R normal big hit is made when the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, the special symbol is displayed 10 times after the long open 2R big hit gaming state. Is controlled to a low-probability non-short-time state after being controlled to a low-probability short-time state. As described above, when the 2R probability variation (latency) big hit of the specific 5, the 2R probability variation (surprise) big hit of the specific 6, and the 2R normal big hit of the non-specific 2 are achieved, the special symbol is displayed after the end of the long open 2R big hit gaming state. Since the control is performed in a time-saving state until the ten variable displays are executed, it is possible to execute a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state. And when the 2R probability variation (latency) big hit of the specific 5 or the 2R normal big hit of the non-specific 2 is reached, both of them are controlled to the non-time-short state when exceeding 10 times of special symbols. While the display device 1400 performs a game effect that is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high-probability state, if the 2R probability change (surprise) big hit of 6 is exceeded, the display of the special symbol exceeded 10 times. However, since the time-short state is continuously controlled, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be changed to a game effect that can be determined to be a high-probability state.

  As described above, in this example, when controlled to a low probability non-time-short state (normal state), a specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, a specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, and a non-specific 2 2R In the case of a normal big hit, after the end of the long open 2R big hit gaming state, the liquid crystal display device 1400 executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state. In the case of a short hit) big hit or small hit, it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state after the end of the short open 2R big hit gaming state or after the end of the small hit gaming state. Playing a game. In this way, a game effect (corresponding to the “latent effect” of the present invention) that is difficult to determine whether or not both are in a high-probability state is executed, but after the long-open 2R jackpot game state ends. The ratio of the high probability state is set to be higher than after the end of the short-open 2R big hit gaming state or after the end of the small hit gaming state. That is, 2R probability variation (latency) big hit of specific 5, 2R probability variation (surprise) big hit of specific 6, 2R normal variation big hit of non-specific 2 2R probability (latency) big hit of specific 5 or 2R probability variation (surprise) big hit of specific 6 Is determined to be higher than the ratio of determining the specific 4 2R probability variation (short open) big hit out of the specific 4 2R probability variation (short open) big hit or small hit.

  Specifically, when the control is performed in the low probability non-short-time state (normal state), 2R probability change (latency) big hit of specific 5, 2R probability change (surprise) big hit of specific 6, 2R normal big hit of non-specific 2 The ratio of determining the 2R probability variation (latency) jackpot of the specific 5 or the 2R probability variation (surprise) jackpot of the specific 6 is determined based on the allocation of each judgment value set in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol. Appearance rate of 2R probability variation (latency) jackpot and specific 6 2R probability variation (surprise probability) jackpot / specific 5 2R probability variation (latency) jackpot, specific 6 2R probability variation (latency) jackpot, non-specific 2 2R regular jackpot appearance rate = (71 + 10) / (71 + 10 + 17) × 100 = 82.7%. On the other hand, when the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, the ratio of the specific 4 2R probability change (short open) big hit or the specific 4 2R probability change (short open) big hit out of the small hits is From the distribution of the respective determination values set in the jackpot determination table corresponding to one special random number and the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the appearance rate of specific 4R probability change (short open) jackpot / specific 4R Appearance rate of probability variation (short open) big hit and small hit = (10/3919 × 20/200) / (10/3919 × 20/200 + 19/3919) × 100 = 5%. For this reason, even if a game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state is executed, after the long open 2R big hit game state ends, the short open 2R big hit game state ends. It is possible to play a game with expectation for a high probability state as compared with after.

  In addition, when it is controlled to the low probability non-short-time state (normal state), when 2R probability change (latency) big hit of specific 5, 2R probability change (surprise) big hit of specific 6, and 2R normal big hit of non-specific 2 In any case, by controlling to the long-open 2R jackpot gaming state, game balls successively win the winning prize opening 2330a. Of the big hit gaming states, the 11R jackpot gaming state and the 5R jackpot gaming state are not as much as the gaming balls. You can expect to win. For this reason, in the long-open 2R big hit game state, it is possible to secure in advance a part or all of the player's possession ball necessary until the next hit occurs. In particular, after the end of the long-open 2R big hit game state, the ratio of the high probability state is set to be higher than after the end of the short open 2R big hit game state or after the end of the small hit game state, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player's ball necessary for the next hit will be satisfied with the game ball acquired in the long-open 2R big hit game state. Therefore, after the end of the long-open 2R big hit gaming state, the liquid crystal display device 1400 executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation in which the player's ball is reduced before the long open 2R big hit game state is controlled.

  In addition, when it is controlled to a low probability non-short-time state (normal state), if it becomes a specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, a specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit or a non-specific 2 2R normal big hit As in the case of the long-open 2R jackpot gaming state, the liquid crystal display device 1400 determines whether or not it is in a high-probability state in order to control the time-short state until the 10-variable display of special symbols is executed. A game effect that is difficult to distinguish is being executed. When the special symbol exceeds 10 fluctuation displays, the time-short state is continuously controlled only when the 6R 2R probability change (surprise) big hit is detected, so it is determined that the state is controlled to the high probability state. It becomes possible to do. For this reason, even after the long-open 2R big hit game state is ended and the game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high-probability state is started, the variable display of the special symbol 10 times is displayed. There is a possibility that it is possible to determine that the state is controlled to the high probability state by continuously controlling the time-short state when exceeding the time limit, and the game can be performed with expectation for the high probability state.

  In addition, the game state is different from the above, and when the state is controlled to a state other than the low probability non-short state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short state or low probability short state), the specific 2R probability change (latency) In the event of a big hit or a specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, after the long-open 2R big hit gaming state, in addition to the 10 symbols of the special symbol, 78 symbols of the special symbol are displayed. Until it reaches a high probability. In addition, when it is controlled to a state other than the low-probability non-time-short state, if it becomes a non-specific 2R normal jackpot, the special symbol will be displayed 10 times after the long-open 2R jackpot game state ends. In addition, the low probability time-short state is controlled until the special symbol 78 times of variable display is executed. Thus, when controlled to a state other than the low-probability non-time-short state, a specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, a specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, and a non-specific 2 2R normal big hit In order to control not only the number of times that the special symbol is displayed 10 times after the end of the long-open 2R big hit gaming state, but also the time until the time when the special symbol is displayed 78 times is displayed. Thus, it is possible to execute a game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state.

  Further, in this example, as a time-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control, the opening time of the movable piece 2032 and the like are controlled to the time-short state which is controlled in the same manner. However, the control content in the short-time state may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. For example, when a specific 1 5R probability change big hit, a specific 2 11R probability change big hit, a specific 3 11R probability change big hit (jump-up bonus), or a non-specific 1 11R normal big hit is executed, it is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. Controls to the first short-time state with normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.3 seconds, specific 4 2R probability change (short open) big hit, specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit When the non-specific 2R normal big hit is achieved, the player is controlled by setting the time change state of the normal symbol executed after the big hit game state to 1 second, which is longer than the first short time state. Therefore, the control may be performed in a first time-short state that is more advantageous to the player and a second time-short state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time-short state.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value allocation is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 5R probability variation big hit, the specific 2 11R probability variation big hit, the specific 3 11R probability variation big hit (jump-up) Bonus), specific 4 2R probability change (short open) big hit, specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, non-specific 2 2R normal big hit On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, determination value allocation is set for specific 2 11R probability variation big hit and non-specific 1 11R normal big hit. For this reason, when a game ball is won at the second start opening 2002, the big hit gaming state with a large number of rounds is used as the type of big hit when the lottery processing of the special symbol is a big hit than the first start opening 2001. There is a high probability of determining a big hit (specific 2 11R probability variation big hit or non-specific 1 11R normal big hit) set to control (11R big hit gaming state). In other words, in the symbol determination table of this example, the expected value of the number of game balls that can be acquired when the special symbol lottery process is a big hit based on the winning of the game balls at the second start port 2002 is as follows. The number of game balls that can be acquired when the special symbol lottery process is a big hit based on the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 2001 is set to be higher than the expected value. In addition, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the judgment value distribution is set only for the specific 2 11R probability variation big hit and the non-specific 1 11R normal big hit, and in any case, the 11R big hit game After the state is over, the time is controlled to the short state until the special symbol is displayed 88 times. For this reason, as long as the special symbol lottery process is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 2002 before the special symbol is displayed 88 times, The right hand can be continued so that many game balls win at the second start opening 2002 or the big winning opening 2330a.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 5R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is determined, the 5R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and when the 11R probability variation jackpot of the specific 2 is determined, the 11R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined. If the 11R probability variation jackpot (jump-up bonus) of 3 is determined, the 11R probability variation jackpot (jump-up bonus) of the first special symbol is determined and the 2R probability variation (short open) jackpot of the specific 4 is determined. If determined, the 2R probability change (short open) jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined, and if the 2R probability change (latency) jackpot of the specific 5 is determined, the 2R probability change (latency) jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined. If the 2R probability change (surprise) jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the 2R probability change (surprise) jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined, and if the 11R normal jackpot of the non-specific 1 is determined, the first special symbol Figure The 11R usually determined to the jackpot symbol, when determined in a non-specific second 2R usually big hit determining the 2R normal big hit symbol of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124). If the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hitting flag is not set as the aspect of the first special symbol (step S126).

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the processing of step S127, these lottery results (indicating either the type of big hit, the small hit, the reach out of the reach, or the outage (stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the above-mentioned information is transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S128, the process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies a specific 1 5R probability variation big hit from big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are stopped. When the 5R probability variation big hit symbol ("0" to "6" or the combination of the same decorative symbols of "8" to "9") is determined, and the specific 11R probability variation big hit is specified among the big hits Is determined to be an 11R probability variable big hit symbol (a combination of the same decorative symbols of “0” to “9”), and when an unspecified two 11R normal big hit is specified among the big hits, an 11R normal big hit symbol (“0” to “2”, “4” to “6” or “8” to “9” in combination of the same decorative symbols), and among the big hits, a specific 3 11R probability variation big hit (jump-up bonus), a specific 4 2R Probability (short open) When a big hit, specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit or non-specific 2 2R normal big hit is specified, 2R normal big hit symbol (predetermined decorative symbol out of the outlier symbols) (Specifically, a combination of decorative patterns of “357”), and when a small hit is specified, a small hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of the missing symbols ( If the reach is determined to be out of reach, it is determined to be a detachable design with a reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same, but the left and right decorative designs are the same). , When a gap is specified, it is determined to be a missing pattern (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same, but the left and right decorative patterns are not the same) without reach, and is specified from the variation pattern command. After the lapse of the dynamic time the determined stop symbols at the (time of the game effects termination) controls display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  In this example, combinations of the same decorative symbols “0” to “2”, “4” to “6”, or “8” to “9” are suspended as decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In this case, it is not possible to determine whether it is a specific 1 5R probability variation big hit, a specific 2 11R probability variation big hit, or a non-specific 2 11R normal big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative design. On the other hand, when the combination of the same decorative symbols “3” or “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 stops changing, the specific 1 5R probability variation big hit or the specific 2 11R from the stopped decorative symbols. It is possible to determine whether to control to a high probability state after the end of the 5R jackpot gaming state or the 11R jackpot gaming state. In particular, when the combination of the same decorative symbol “7” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 stops changing, it is the 11R probability variation big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and has the largest number of rounds. It can be determined that the acquisition of the 11R jackpot gaming state is confirmed. Further, when the combination of the decoration symbol “357” as the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 stops changing, the 3R 11R probability change big hit (jump-up bonus) from the decoration symbol stop symbol and the 2R probability change of the specification 4 are displayed. It is not possible to determine whether the hit is (short open) big hit, specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, non-specific 2 2R normal big hit or small hit.

  FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 218, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state When the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, that is, when it is a normal loss (a failure where the reach effect is not executed), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the loss (Not shown) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the substrate 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 641 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is compared by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number, as in the above-described prior determination table. Is set to determine. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers coincide with a determination value (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with a low expectation degree of jackpot. Is matched with a determination value (164 to 222) indicating execution of the same, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are consistent with a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot is executed. As described above, the above random numbers are associated with each other. The super reach production has a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production, and when the super reach production is executed, the player's degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined in step S151 whether or not the counter value of the short time counter in which the short time state continuation number is set is “0”. To do. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the control of the time reduction state is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, At the time, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 220, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display 641 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, when the high probability end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the high probability end flag (step S184) and resets the high probability flag (step S185). ). As a result, the control in the high probability state is terminated and the control in the low probability state is started.

  Further, when the above-mentioned time-short end flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time-short end flag (step S187) and resets the time-short flag (step S188). As a result, the time-short state control is terminated and the non-time-short state control is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S189), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S190). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S191). Then, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, the high probability flag and the short time flag are reset (step S192), and the first special symbol process flag is set to the first value which is the initial value. When the process is updated so that the process shifts to the special symbol normal process (step S193), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010, and is individually prepared according to the jackpot type. In step S190, the types of jackpots (specific 1 5R probability variation big hit, specific 2 11R probability variation big hit, specific 3 11R probability variation big hit (jump-up bonus), specific 4 2R probability variation (short open) big hit, specific 5 2R probability variation Big hit start command (5R positive variation big hit start command, specific 2 11R positive big hit) according to (latency) big hit, specific 6 2R probability change (surprise) big hit, non-specific 1 11R normal big hit, non-specific 2 2R normal big hit Start command, 11R probability change jackpot (jump-up bonus) start command, 2R probability change (short open) jackpot start command, 2R probability change (latency) jackpot start command, 2R probability change (surprise) jackpot start command, 11R normal jackpot start command, 2R normal Set jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp / LED, the speakers 121, 391, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S194), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started (step S195). The standby time until the start of the small hit gaming state (the time for displaying to start the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S196). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S197), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When updated to (step S193), this process is terminated. The small hitting start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. In step S195, by setting the small hitting start command, the effect of the small hitting gaming state instructed by the small hitting start command is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is executed by the apparatus 1400, the lamp / LED, the speakers 121, 391, and the like.

[7-1. How to display special symbols]
As described above, as the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, the segment display SEG1 and the segment display SEG2 each having the same display surface are used. The first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2001 and the second special symbol based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 2002 may be variably displayed. A display device having a display surface may be used. Here, an example where the display surfaces of the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are different from each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display surface of the first special symbol display 641, and FIG. 221 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display surface of the second special symbol display 642.

  First, in the present embodiment, as a control process of the main control MPU 4100a when it is determined that a game ball has entered the first start port 2001, the first symbol random number and symbol determination are determined when the jackpot is determined. The type of jackpot is determined by comparing with the table (see Fig. 214 (C)), and the type at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) corresponds to the type of jackpot If the big hit symbol is determined, and if the small bonus is determined, the small bonus symbol is determined as the mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped. As an example of the above, a slip symbol is determined. The first special symbol display 641 performs variable display control of the first special symbol for a predetermined variation time based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined according to the determination result, and then according to the determination result. The stop control of the first special symbol determined in this way (any one of the big hit symbol corresponding to the type of big hit, the small hit symbol, or the off symbol) is stopped in variable control.

  This first special symbol display 641 (corresponding to the “first special symbol display means” of the present invention) is a dot-shaped 8 having no regularity in the arrangement of each LED as shown in FIG. 221 (A). It consists of two LEDs 641a to 641h (corresponding to the “light emitting part” of the present invention), and can display 2 8 = 256 types of modes depending on the combination of the light emitting states (lighted or turned off) of each LED 641a to 641h It has become. Among these aspects, one kind of aspect is set as a stop symbol (disconnected symbol) of the first special symbol corresponding to the judgment result, and the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first special symbol corresponding to the big hit is determined. ), 200 types of modes are set, and 50 types of modes are set as the stop symbols (small hit symbols) of the first special symbol whose determination result corresponds to the small hit. When the determination result is determined to be out of place, one type of mode is always determined and displayed on the first special symbol display 641, whereas when the determination result is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, Any one of 200 types or 50 types that do not overlap each other is determined and displayed on the first special symbol display 641.

  Specifically, 200 kinds of modes are set as stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the first special symbol whose determination result corresponds to the jackpot, but these modes are the first symbol random number range (0 to 199). ) Are associated with each value in a 1: 1 correspondence. That is, in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 214 (C)) that is referred to when the determination result is determined as a jackpot, not only the jackpot type but also the first jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type for the first symbol random number. A special symbol stop symbol (a jackpot symbol) is also stored in an associated manner. In this embodiment, 40 types are set as 5R probability variation big hit symbols corresponding to a specific 1R 5R probability variation big hit, and 40 types are set as 11R probability variation big hit symbols corresponding to a specific 211R probability variation big hit. 2 types of 11R probability variation big hit (jump-up bonus) corresponding to 11R probability variation big hit (jump-up bonus) are set as 2 types, and 2R probability variation (short open) big hit corresponding to specific 4R (short open) 20 types of big hit symbols are set, 71 types of 2R probability change (latency) big hits corresponding to specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hits are set, 71 types of specific 2R probability change (surprise) big hits are supported 10 types are set as the 2R probability change (surprise) jackpot symbol, and 1R as the 2R normal jackpot symbol corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot of non-specific 2 When the type of jackpot is determined and the type of jackpot is determined based on the acquired first symbol random number, any of the 200 types of stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first special symbol corresponding to the jackpot type These aspects are also determined.

  In addition, 50 kinds of modes are set as stop symbols (small hit symbols) of the first special symbol corresponding to the determination result, but these modes are small hit symbols for determining the small hit symbol. It is stored in the form of being associated with each value in the range of random numbers (0 to 49) in a 1: 1 correspondence. That is, in the symbol determination table (not shown) that is referred to when the determination result is determined for the small hit, the first special symbol corresponding to the small hit is stopped for the small hit symbol random number (small hit symbol) Is stored in an associated form. In this embodiment, when the determination result is determined for a small hit, the symbol determination table is referred to, and the first special symbol corresponding to the small hit based on the acquired small hit symbol random number is set as a stop symbol (small hit symbol) 50 Any aspect of the type is determined.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a control process of the main control MPU 4100a when it is determined that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2002, the second symbol random number and symbol determination are determined when the jackpot is determined. By comparing with the table (see Fig. 214 (C)), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode when the variable control of the second special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the second special symbol) corresponds to the type of jackpot When the big hit symbol is determined, and it is determined to be out of place, the off symbol is determined as the mode when the variation control of the second special symbol is stopped. The second special symbol display 642 performs variable display control of the second special symbol for a predetermined variation time based on the variation pattern of the second special symbol determined according to the determination result, and then according to the determination result. The variable control is stopped for the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined in this way (one of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot or the off symbol).

  As shown in FIG. 221 (B), the second special symbol display 642 (corresponding to the “second special symbol display means” of the present invention) has seven segments 642a˜ 642g and one dot 642h (corresponding to the “light-emitting portion” of the present invention). This is a general seven-segment display, and like the first special symbol display 641, each segment 642a to 642g and dot 642h Depending on the combination of the light emission states (lighted or extinguished), 2 8 = 256 types of modes can be displayed. Among these aspects, one kind of aspect is set as a stop symbol (disconnected symbol) of the first special symbol corresponding to the judgment result, and the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first special symbol corresponding to the big hit is determined. ) 200 types of modes are set. When the determination result is determined to be off, one type is always determined and displayed on the second special symbol display 642, whereas when the determination result is determined to be a big hit, 200 types are determined. Either aspect is determined and displayed on the second special symbol display 642.

  Specifically, although 200 types of modes are set as stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the second special symbol whose determination result corresponds to the jackpot, these modes are the second symbol random number range (0 to 199). ) Are associated with each value in a 1: 1 correspondence. That is, in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 214 (C)) that is referred to when the determination result is determined as a jackpot, not only the jackpot type but also the second jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type for the second symbol random number. A special symbol stop symbol (a jackpot symbol) is also stored in an associated manner. In this embodiment, 183 types of 11R probability variation big hit symbols corresponding to specific 2 11R probability big hit symbols are set, and 17 types of 11R normal big hit symbols corresponding to non-specific 1R normal big hit symbols are set. When determining the jackpot type based on the acquired second symbol random number, it is determined that any one of the 200 types is determined as the stop symbol (hit symbol) of the second special symbol corresponding to the jackpot type It has become.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the first special symbol display 641 capable of displaying the first special symbol, the indicator configured by eight dot-shaped LEDs 641a to 641h having no regularity in the arrangement of the respective LEDs. The second special symbol display 642 that can display the second special symbol is composed of seven segments 642a to 642g and one dot 642h having regularity in the arrangement of each segment. A general 7-segment display is used. More specifically, the eight LEDs 641a to 641h constituting the first special symbol display 641 are arranged at random as if forming a constellation, so that each of the LEDs 641a to 641h The arrangement is not regular, and each of the dot-shaped LEDs 641a to 641h is configured to have the same size, so that a plurality of types of modes that can be displayed on the first special symbol display 641 ( The first special symbol) is difficult to distinguish. On the other hand, regarding the seven segments 642a to 642g constituting the second special symbol display 642, the four vertical segments 642b, 642c, 642e, 642f and the three horizontal segments 642a, 642d, 642g are directions. By arranging the segments 642a to 642g in regular order and arranging the segments 642a to 642g to have substantially the same length, the second special A plurality of types of modes (second special symbols) that can be displayed on the symbol display 642 are easily distinguished. Therefore, the first special symbol that can be displayed on the first special symbol display 641 can be displayed on the second special symbol display 642 while the number of the same mode as the second special symbol display 642 can be displayed. It is more difficult to distinguish the aspect than the second special symbol. That is, the first special symbol that can be displayed on the first special symbol display 641 is displayed on the second special symbol display 642, although the player can identify the type of jackpot as the second special symbol display 642. It is more difficult to determine the type of jackpot than possible second special symbols.

  In the first special symbol display 641, a plurality of modes are set as stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the first special symbol corresponding to the big hit type, but eight LEDs 641 a to 641 h are provided for each big hit type. In order to prevent specific LEDs from being turned on (or turned off), the second special symbol display 642 has a plurality of types of modes as stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the second special symbol corresponding to the big hit type. Although set, care is taken so that a specific segment or dot among the seven segments 642a to 642g and one dot 642h is not turned on (or turned off) for each jackpot type.

  By the way, as described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball has entered the first start port 2001, the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number is specified 4 2R probability change (short open) big hit, specific 5 2R probability change (latent) big hit, non-specific 2 2R normal big hit are included, and the small hit may be determined based on the first symbol random number. Among these big hits, if the 2R probability variation (latency) big hit of the specific 5 and the 2R normal big hit of the non-specific 2 (corresponding to the “special hit” of the present invention), the probability is high after the end of the long-open 2R big hit gaming state Alternatively, the liquid crystal display device 1400 (which controls the time-short state with a low probability and controls the non-time-short state with a high probability or a low probability when the special symbol exceeds 10 variable displays. A game effect that is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state is executed in the “effect display means” of the present invention. In addition, when the specific 4R 2R probability change (short opening) big hit or small hit (also equivalent to the “special hit” of the present invention) is reached, after the short open 2R big hit gaming state or after the small hit gaming state In the liquid crystal display device 1400, a game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state is executed while controlling to a non-time-short state with a high probability or a low probability after the end of the game.

  As described above, when the big hit (or the small hit) that triggers the execution of the game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high-probability state, the variable display of the special symbol 10 times is performed. There is a difference between whether or not to control the short-time state with a high probability or low probability until is executed, but in any case a non-short-time state with a high probability after the end of the big hit gaming state (small hit gaming state) ( There is a possibility of control to a high probability non-short-time state. In the non-short-time state, the probability that the above-mentioned normal symbol lottery results will be a hit is very low, and a right-hand hit cannot be expected to generate a big hit. Compared to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002, the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 2001 is more difficult to win, and the player's ball is decreasing, which makes the game difficult for the player. Must be done. For this reason, if the non-temporal state with a high probability (high probability non-temporal state) is controlled in the non-temporal state, the game is avoided if the non-temporal state with low probability (low probability non-temporal state) is controlled. There are many players who want to play, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high-probability state because the player identifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot in the first special symbol display 641 (big hit symbol). The big hit (or small hit) that triggers the execution of a game production that is difficult to determine whether or not the big hit is set to control the non-short-time state with a high probability among the non-short-time states (this implementation) In the form, there is a player who tries to determine whether or not a specific 4 2R probability change (short open) jackpot or a specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit). However, as described above, for the first special symbol that can be displayed on the first special symbol indicator 641, the player can identify the type of jackpot as the second special symbol indicator 642, but the second special symbol indicator can be identified. It is difficult to determine the type of jackpot than the second special symbol that can be displayed on the symbol display 642. Therefore, it is difficult for the first special symbol display 641 to determine the type of big hit (or small hit) that triggers the execution of a game effect that is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state. Thus, unfairness due to whether or not the player visually recognizes the first special symbol display 641 can be made difficult to occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball has entered the second start port 2002, a specific 4R probability change (4) is determined as the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number ( Short open) big hit, specific 5 2R probability change (latency) big hit, non-specific 2 2R normal big hit is not included, specific 2 11R positive change big hit, non-specific 1 11R normal big hit only. These jackpots are jackpots set so as to be controlled to a time-short state with a high probability or a low probability after the end of the gaming state per 11R, and there is an entrance of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2001. The possibility of controlling to a non-short-time state (high probability non-short-time state) with a high probability remains after the end of the big hit gaming state (small hit gaming state) as in the case where it is determined that the liquid crystal display device In 1400, there is no case of executing a game effect that is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state. For this reason, there is no player trying to identify the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the second special symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot in the second special symbol indicator 642, and it can be displayed on the second special symbol indicator 642. Even if the type of jackpot is easily determined from the second special symbol, there is no problem.

  In the present embodiment, 200 kinds of modes are set as stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the first special symbol corresponding to the big hit in the determination result, and each value in the first symbol random number range (0 to 199) is set. Although it is associated with 1: 1 correspondence, it may not be associated with each value with 1: 1 correspondence. For example, among all ranges (0 to 199) of the first symbol random number, the type of jackpot that triggers execution of a game effect that is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state (this embodiment) The type of these jackpots is more than the range occupied by the first symbol random numbers associated with the specific 4 2R probability variation (short open) jackpot, the specific 5 2R probability variation (latency) jackpot, and the non-specific 2 2R regular jackpot) The number of modes that can be displayed on the first special symbol display 641 as a stop symbol (big hit symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol may be set to be increased. At this time, the stop symbol of the first special symbol corresponding to the big hit (big hit symbol) may maintain the number of 200 types of modes, but more than the number of 200 types of modes (for example, The number of modes that can be displayed on the first special symbol display 641 may be increased). In this way, the first special symbol as the first special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type that triggers the execution of the game effect that is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state is the first special symbol. By increasing the number of modes that can be displayed on the symbol display 641, the first special symbol display 641 can make it more difficult to discriminate these big hit types (or small hits).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the determination result is determined to be a big hit (or small hit), a plurality of types of stop symbols (big hit symbols or small hit symbols) of special symbols corresponding to the type of big hit (or small hit) Any aspect is displayed on a predetermined special symbol display (the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642), whereas when the determination result is determined to be off, it corresponds to the off One kind of aspect is always displayed on a predetermined special symbol display (the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642) as a special symbol stop symbol (offset symbol). In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol (outlier symbol) corresponding to the detachment, all LEDs 641a to 641h constituting the first special symbol indicator 641 are turned on, or the second special symbol indicator 642 is used. All the segments 642a to 642g and the dots 642h to be configured are set in a lighting state. As described above, in the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, the player can easily identify only the stop symbol (offset symbol) of the special symbol corresponding to the loss, for example, liquid crystal It is possible to clearly discriminate whether or not at least the determination result is a big hit (or a small hit) without the player being confused by the symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the display device 1400.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are provided as a function display unit 640 on the lower right side of the game area 605 and are arranged at substantially the center of the game area 605. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is provided in an inconspicuous region of the game board 4. In addition to this, a symbol (decoration) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 rather than a first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or a second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 642. In general, the player pays attention to the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 may be any region outside the game region 605 in the game board 4 (however, a region that can be viewed by the player through the game window 101). ), And each special symbol indicator may be provided in a different area of the game board 4. For example, in a region where the distance from the second start port 2002 to the second special symbol display 642 is larger than the distance from the first start port 2001 to the first special symbol display 641, A symbol display 641 and a second special symbol display 642 may be provided. As a result, for a player who is playing a left-handed game (a game being controlled in a non-short-time state), the first start port 2001 is more suitable for a right-handed game (a game being controlled in a short-time state). Since it is harder to win the game ball than the second start port 2002 and it is necessary to pay attention to whether or not the game ball wins the first start port 2001, it is provided in a region away from the first start port 2001. It is difficult to visually recognize the first special symbol that can be displayed on the first special symbol display 641, and it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot than the second special symbol that can be displayed on the second special symbol display 642. It can be.

[8. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 222, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp / LED, the speakers 121, 391, and the like based on the command received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 223 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the liquid crystal is based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Control processing related to the display device 1400 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 121 and 391 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3031 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

[9. Hold notice effect]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is performed until the hold display (notification information H) displayed in the first display area 1401a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is digested based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control board 4100. And a display mode of a light emitting decoration unit 2105 (corresponding to the “effect body” of the present invention) provided outside the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a variable display of special symbols based on the hold display (variable display of special symbols) ) Is performing a hold notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot for. The hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 247. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect control process executed by the peripheral control board 4140 for controlling the hold display and light emitting decoration unit 2105 displayed in the first display area 1401a. FIG. 225 and FIG. 226 are hold notice determination tables used to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice effect and the type of the hold notice effect (hold notice pattern).

  As shown in FIG. 224, in the hold notice effect control process executed in the effect control process (step S602), first, the hold notice effect is executed for the hold display in the first display area 1401a based on the winning. Control whether or not. Specifically, based on the fact that a game ball is won (start condition is established) at the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, it is determined whether or not a hold number command is transmitted from the main control board 4100. (Step S301). If it is determined in step S301 that the hold number command is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 (NO), the hold display in the first display area 1401a is not added, and the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined in step S301 that a hold number command has been transmitted from the main control board 4100 (YES), it is determined whether or not a hold notice effect is being executed (step S302), and the hold notice effect is executed. When it is determined that it is in the middle (YES), the hold display in the first display area 1401a is added (step S310), but the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold display, and the process goes to step S311. Transition. As described above, two or more on-hold displays among the eight on-hold displays that can be displayed in the first display area 1401a (four on-hold displays for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are reserved. The notice announcement effect is not executed at the same time, and the hold notice effect is prevented from being mixed with the hold display in the first display area 1401a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not being executed (NO in step S302), the hold notice determination table (illustrated) used to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice effect for the hold display is shown. (No) is selected (step S303). If the result of comparison between the selected hold advance notice determination table and the read hold advance notice determination random number (step S304) indicates that the hold advance notice is to be executed (YES), the hold number command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is determined. The hold notice determination table corresponding to the hold number (holding memory number) specified from the hold number command and the prior determination information (losing, jackpot 1 to jackpot 3, reach 1 to reach 9) After selection (step S305), the selected hold notice determination table is compared with the read hold notice decision random number (step S306), and the type of the hold notice pattern set in the hold notice determination table is determined.

  On the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected hold advance notice determination table and the read hold advance notice determination random number (step S304), when it is determined that the hold advance notice is not executed (NO), the hold display in the first display area 1401a is added. However (step S310), the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold display, and the process proceeds to step S311. In the case where the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold display, the hold display for the first special symbol is white (basic color) and the second special symbol is added as a mode for adding the hold display in the first display area 1401a. The hold display lights up in yellow (basic color).

  In the reservation notice determination table, when reach 1, 4, 7 is specified as advance determination information from the hold number command, reach 2, 5, 8 is specified, or reach 3, 6, 9 is specified In each of the cases, the hold notice determination table corresponding to the advance determination information is the same, that is, the same notice that the hold notice effect set in the hold notice determination table corresponding to the advance determination information is executed even if the advance determination information is different. It is set to be determined by probability. That is, there is a probability that the pending notice is executed when there is a possibility that the current gaming state is in the probability change (for example, reach 1) and there is no possibility that the current game state is in the probability change (for example, reach 4, 7). It doesn't change. However, when there is a possibility that the current gaming state is in the probability change (for example, reach 1), it is indicated that the holding notice effect is executed more than in the case where there is no possibility of the probability change (for example, reach 4, 7). You may set so that it may determine with a high probability. Such a setting is, for example, the variation of the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the 2R probability change (latency) big hit of 5 is specified, the 2R probability change (surprise) big hit of 6 is specified, or the 2R normal big hit of non-specific 2 is set. Each stop mode (stop symbol) shows a 2R jackpot symbol, and after each long open 2R jackpot game state is controlled, it is controlled during probability change (high probability state), short time or normal (low probability state). This is particularly effective when a game effect (latent effect) in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the probability change is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (so-called internal probability change state). That is, when a game effect whose current game state is difficult to discriminate is executed, if the hold notice effect is frequently executed, the probability that the current game state is definitely changing is increased, and the player's response to the jackpot game state is increased. Expectation can be raised. In addition, since the hold notice effect is an effect based on the lottery result as the prior determination information and suggests the big hit expectation degree, the hold notice effect is frequently executed. Rather than suggesting whether or not the current game state is being changed using the displayed background image, character, or the like, the player's sense of expectation can be raised. And even if this lottery result is out of date, as long as the hold notice effect is frequently executed, it is predicted that the lottery result will be a big hit next, and the current gaming state is changing There must be a game without doubts.

  The hold notice determination table shown in FIGS. 225 and 226 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b, and when the hold notice effect is executed for the hold display, for each hold number command transmitted from the main control board 4100, In other words, the table is used to determine the type of the hold notice pattern for each hold number (holding storage number) and prior determination information (losing, big hit 1 to big hit 3, reach 1 to reach 9). Specifically, a table corresponding to each prior determination information as shown in FIG. 225 (A) is provided as a hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1). As shown in FIG. 225 (B), a table corresponding to each prior determination information is provided as a hold notice determination table used for the hold number = 2), and the hold notice used when hold 3 lights up (hold number = 3). As shown in FIG. 226 (C), a table corresponding to each pre-determination information is provided as a decision table. As a hold notice determination table used when hold 4 is turned on (the number of holds = 4), FIG. As shown, a table corresponding to each piece of prior determination information is provided.

  Here, a plurality of types of hold notice patterns set in the hold notice determination table corresponding to the number of holds (the number of stored memories) and prior determination information (losing, jackpot 1 to jackpot 3, reach 1 to reach 9) will be described. In these hold advance notice patterns, the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a and the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 are stored every time the hold storage is digested by the number of holds at the time of winning (holding memory count). It is set whether to change. Further, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 has many display modes (the same color scheme) that are linked to the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a, but is not linked to the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a. The display mode (different color schemes) is indicated in parentheses in the pending notice pattern (for example, pending notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 when hold 2 is lit) described in the hold notice determination table shown in FIGS. 225 and 226. Show.

  Specifically, in the hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is turned on (the number of holds = 1), the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a does not change (that is, only the hold display is digested). Yes) The hold notice pattern in which only the hold display mode for one time and the display form of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 are set is associated, and the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 lights (hold number = 2) Since the state of the hold display can be changed once before the hold display is exhausted, the hold notice pattern in which the hold display mode for two times and the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 are set is associated, and the hold 3 lights up. In the hold notice determination table used at the time (hold number = 3), the hold display mode can be changed twice before digesting the hold display. And the hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is set are associated, and the hold notice display table used when the hold 4 lights up (the number of holds = 4) holds the hold display until the hold display is used. 3 can be changed three times, the hold notice pattern in which the hold display mode for four times and the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 are set is stored in association with each other.

  Moreover, as a mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a set in the hold notice pattern, there is no distinction between the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hold display blinks in a basic color, blue, green, red, Five modes are prepared to light up in one of the rainbow colors (blue, green, red, and blinking alternately). When determining the hold notice pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the transition of the hold display mode to the end, the big hit expectation is high in the order of blinking in the basic color → blue → green → red → rainbow color It is set to be. In other words, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit (big hit 1 to big hit 3) as the prior determination information, a high probability of a hold notice pattern that becomes a color arrangement with a high expectation degree of big hit (for example, rainbow color) as a final hold display mode When the lottery result is determined to be out of place (losing, reach 1 to reach 9) as prior determination information, the color arrangement with a low expectation degree of big hits (for example, blinking in the basic color) is used as the final hold display mode. By determining the hold notice pattern with a high probability, when the final hold display mode is displayed with a color scheme having a high jackpot expectation level, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state is increased.

  In the hold notice pattern, the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a does not change in the reverse order of the order of blinking → blue → green → red → rainbow color. Sometimes the hold display mode is maintained, or the next color scheme is set to be a color scheme with a high expectation degree of jackpot. For this reason, even if a hold display mode is displayed with a color scheme with a low jackpot expectation level, there is still a possibility of transition to a color scheme with a high jackpot expectation level when digesting the hold display. You can get attention with your expectations.

  In addition, the hold notice pattern does not necessarily change in the order of blue → green → red → rainbow color after the display of the hold display blinks in the basic color, and starts from the middle coloration (for example, when the hold 1 lights up) Suddenly the rainbow color is started by the hold notice pattern number 5), and the color scheme is changed to the next color after skipping the middle color (for example, from the blinking rainbow color to the basic color by the hold notice pattern number 6 when the hold 2 light is on) It is also set to do. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of holding | maintenances) that the mode of a hold display changes, the mode of a hold display can be displayed by the color scheme with high expectation degree of big hits. In addition, even if the hold display mode is displayed with a color scheme with a low expectation level, it is impossible to predict which color scheme will change to the next color scheme. Can do.

  Further, in the hold notice pattern, when a game ball wins the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 (start condition is established), the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a and the light emitting decoration unit 2105 are displayed. In principle, each display mode is lit with a color scheme that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, but only the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is set to illuminate with a color scheme that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot. Yes. For example, in the hold notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 when the hold 2 is lit, the hold notice pattern numbers 5 and 8 when the hold 3 is lit, and the hold notice pattern numbers 7 and 11 when the hold 4 is lit, the first start port 2001 or the second When a game ball wins at the starting port 2002, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 blinks in a basic color (in this example, it blinks in a basic color, but any color scheme suggesting a big hit expectation degree may be used. However, the mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a is set to light up in the basic color without lighting up in the color scheme suggesting the big hit expectation degree. When these hold notice patterns are executed, the start of the hold notice effect is recognized only when the player pays attention to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 including the hold display in the first display area 1401a. I can't. Accordingly, only the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is turned on in advance with a color scheme that suggests the expected degree of jackpot, so that not only the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the display of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is expected to pay attention. Can do.

  In the hold notice pattern such as the hold notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 when the hold 2 is lit as described above, the light is emitted when the game ball is won (start condition is established) in the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2002. Although only the display mode of the decoration unit 2105 is preceded and lighted with a color scheme that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, the mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a is changed before digesting the hold that is the target of the hold notice effect. It is set to light up with the same color as the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105. For example, in the hold notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 when the hold 2 is lit, the hold notice pattern numbers 5 and 8 when the hold 3 is lit, and the hold notice pattern numbers 7 and 11 when the hold 4 is lit, when one hold is consumed ( The display of the hold display in the first display area 1401a can be changed to the light emitting decoration unit as long as it is before the hold that is the target of the hold notice effect is consumed. It is set to change to the same color in conjunction with the display mode 2105. For this reason, even if the player pays attention to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and misses the start of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect of the hold notice effect is not obtained until the hold subject to the hold notice effect is digested. Can recognize execution.

  In addition, with respect to the hold notice pattern such as the hold notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 when the hold 2 is turned on, only the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is turned on in advance when the hold notice pattern is determined from the hold notice determination table. The final hold display mode is set to be a color scheme with a high expectation level for jackpots, rather than the hold notice pattern that does not. For example, when the reach 1, 4 and 7 are specified as prior determination information from the hold number command, the hold advance notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 when the hold 2 is lit, the hold advance notice pattern numbers 5 and 8 when the hold 3 is turned on, the hold 4 When the reservation notice pattern numbers 7 and 11 for lighting are not determined, when reach 2, 5, 8 or reach 3, 6, 9 is specified, these hold notification patterns should be determined. Can do. For this reason, when only the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is lit in a color scheme that suggests the jackpot expectation level, a reach effect with a high level of jackpot expectation is executed at the time of digestion of the hold that is the target of the hold notice effect. The final hold display mode is displayed in either a red or rainbow color scheme, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  At the start of the hold notice effect, the game ball is won using the left side guide member 2180 (see FIG. 151) provided on the line connecting the first start port 2001 and the light emitting decoration unit 2105 in the game area 605. A guidance effect by inductive light emission from the possible first start port 2001 toward the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is executed. Specifically, the LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate that projects light toward the lens portion 2182 in the left side guide member 2180 are sequentially turned on from the right side to the left side of the left side guide member 2180, thereby guiding the LED. Inductive light emission in the production is realized. In addition to the left side guide member 2180, a member capable of emitting light provided in the game area 605 may be used so that inductive light emission is concentrated toward the light emitting decoration unit 2105. According to this, even if attention is paid to whether or not the game ball wins the first start port 2001, the guidance effect is executed at the start of the hold notice effect executed immediately after winning the first start port 2001. This naturally guides the player's line of sight toward the light emitting decoration unit 2105, making it difficult to overlook the start of the hold notice effect. Therefore, when only the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is turned on in advance with a color scheme that suggests the expected degree of jackpot, first, attention is paid to the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105, and the start of the hold notice effect is started. It is difficult to overlook, and even if it is compared with the hold display displayed in the first display area 1401a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 afterwards, it is recognized whether it is lit in the same color in conjunction with the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105. be able to.

  In addition, in the hold notice pattern, in principle, the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a changes in the same color in conjunction with the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105. In addition, it is set so as to change with a different color scheme without interlocking with the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a. For example, in the hold notice pattern numbers 6 and 10 when the hold 3 is lit and the hold notice pattern numbers 8 and 13 when the hold 4 is lit, the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is set before the hold that is the target of the hold notice effect is digested. The display mode is a color scheme having a higher jackpot expectation than the mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a (for example, in the hold notice pattern number 6 when the hold 3 is lit, the first display area 1401a is displayed when one hold is consumed. The display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is set to light up in the transition from blue to green, while the hold display mode in FIG. When these hold notice patterns are executed, the player only recognizes the difference in the color scheme in the hold notice effect if the player pays attention to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 including the hold display in the first display area 1401a. Can not do it. In these hold notice patterns, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 has priority over the hold display form in the first display area 1401a, and this priority is given when the hold that is the target of the hold notice effect is digested. The display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is maintained, or the next color scheme is set to be a color scheme with a high expectation level for jackpots. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a is not partially linked with the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105, the color scheme in the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 having the higher expectation level of jackpot is changed. By giving priority, not only the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the display of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 can be expected with attention.

  In the hold notice pattern such as the hold notice pattern numbers 6 and 10 when the hold 3 is lit as described above, a part of the hold notice pattern has a different color scheme without being interlocked with the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a. Although it is lit, the display mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a is set to be turned on again in the same color as the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 before digesting the hold that is the subject of the hold notice effect. Yes. For example, in the hold advance notice pattern number 6 and 10 when the hold 3 is lit and the hold advance notice pattern number 8 when the hold 4 is turned on, the hold notice pattern number 13 when the hold 4 is turned on and the hold notice pattern number 13 when the hold 4 is turned on When the three are digested, the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a is set to change again to the same color scheme in conjunction with the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105. For this reason, even if the player is paying attention to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and misses the color difference in the hold notice effect, the hold notice is required until the hold subject to the hold notice effect is exhausted. The final color scheme in the production can be recognized.

  Further, regarding the hold notice pattern such as the hold notice pattern numbers 6 and 10 when the hold 3 is lit as described above, when the hold notice pattern is determined from the hold notice determination table, the color scheme is different from the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a. The final hold display mode is set to be a color scheme with a high expectation level for jackpots rather than the hold notice pattern that does not light up at. For example, when reach 1, 4 and 7 are specified as prior determination information from the hold number command, hold advance notice pattern numbers 6 and 10 when hold 3 is lit and hold advance notice pattern numbers 8 and 13 when hold 4 is turned on are determined. On the other hand, when the reach 2, 5, 8 or the reach 3, 6, 9 is specified, these reservation notice patterns can be determined. For this reason, when a part of the hold display is turned on with a color scheme different from the display form of the hold display in the first display area 1401a, a reach with a high expectation level at least when hitting the hold subject to the hold notice effect. The execution of the effect is confirmed, and the final hold display mode is displayed in either a red or rainbow color scheme, which increases the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state.

  Note that in the above-described hold notice pattern such as the hold notice pattern numbers 6 and 10 when the hold 3 is turned on, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is changed to the display of the hold display in the first display area 1401a in a part of the hold digestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a is expected to be a big hit than the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105. You may set so that it may light with a high color scheme. Further, in these hold notice patterns, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is given priority over the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a in part of the hold digestion. Although it is set to suggest the jackpot expectation with priority on the aspect (color arrangement) of, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the aspect with the lower expectation degree (color arrangement) is given priority to suggest the jackpot expectation You may add and set. At this time, paying attention to the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 and the display mode of the hold in the first display area 1401a, even if the difference in the color arrangement in the hold notice effect is recognized, the big hit expectation is suggested by giving priority to any mode. I can't judge whether I'm doing it. However, for example, after executing the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 and the display mode of the hold on the first display area 1401a in different modes (color schemes) with the big hit expectation degree, which mode is prioritized by internal lottery By visually executing the effect to be selected, it is possible to determine which mode should be given priority to the player, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the display of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 are continued. It can be noticed.

  In addition, in the hold notice determination table, only when jackpots 1 and 2 are specified as prior determination information from the hold number command, a hold notice pattern that becomes a rainbow color as a final hold display mode (hold notice when hold 1 lights up) It is possible to determine pattern number 5, hold advance notice pattern numbers 6 and 7 when hold 2 is lit, hold advance notice pattern numbers 8 to 11 when hold 3 is turned on, and hold notice pattern numbers 11 to 15 when hold 4 is turned on. Is set. For this reason, when the hold display mode is displayed in rainbow color, the lottery result at the time of digestion of the hold display is either a specific 1 5R probability change big hit, a specific 2 11R probability change big hit, or a non-specific 1 11R normal big hit. As a result, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state in which many game balls can be acquired in five rounds or more is increased.

  In addition, in the hold notice determination table, when jackpot 3 is specified as pre-determined information from the hold number command, a hold notice pattern that does not always execute the hold notice effect for the hold display (hold notice when the hold 1-4 lights up) The pattern number 0) is set to be determined. That is, as the prior determination information, the 11R probability variation big hit (jump-up bonus) of the specific 3 2R probability variation (short open) big hit of the specific 4, the 2R probability variation (latency) big hit of the specific 5, the 2R probability variation of the specific 6 (surprise) When either big hit or non-specific 2R normal big hit or small hit is specified, the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold display.

  In addition, in the hold advance notice determination table, a hold advance notice pattern that blinks in a basic color as a final hold display mode whenever a deviation from the hold number command is specified as the pre-determined information is always displayed. While the notice pattern number 1) is determined, when the jackpot 1, 2 or reach 1-9 is specified as the prior decision information from the hold number command, the hold notice pattern that blinks in the basic color as the final hold display mode It is set so that it is possible to determine other hold notice patterns. For this reason, when the hold display mode is displayed in any one of the colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow, it is determined that the reach effect is executed at least when reaching the hold display, The player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state is increasing.

  Further, in the hold advance notice determination table, when the reach 2, 5, 8 is specified as the prior determination information from the hold number command, the reach 3, 6, 9 is further specified when the reach 2, 5, 8 is specified. In the case, the hold notice pattern that is a color scheme having a high jackpot expectation as the final hold display mode (for example, hold notice pattern number 4 when hold 1 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 4 and 5 when hold 2 is lit, The hold notice pattern numbers 5 to 7 when the hold 3 is lit and the hold notice pattern numbers 7 to 10 when the hold 4 is turned on are set to be determined with high probability. For this reason, when the hold display mode is displayed in a color scheme with a high jackpot expectation level, there is a high probability of executing a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level when digesting the hold display, and the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state The degree is getting higher.

  Also, in the hold notice determination table, when reach 1, 4, 7 is specified as prior determination information from the hold number command, reach 2, 5, 8 is specified, or reach 3, 6, 9 is specified In each of the cases, the hold notice determination tables corresponding to the advance determination information are the same, that is, even if the prior decision information is different, the hold advance notice patterns set in the hold notice determination table corresponding to the advance determination information have the same probability. Is set to determine. That is, when the current gaming state is likely to be probabilistic (for example, reach 1) and when there is no possibility that the current gaming state is probable (for example, reach 4, 7), the hold display mode is expected to be a big hit The probability of being displayed with a high color scheme does not change. However, when there is a possibility that the current gaming state is in the probability change (for example, reach 1), the hold display mode is expected to be a big hit than in the case where there is no possibility of the probability change (for example, reach 4, 7). It may be set so that the hold notice pattern displayed with a high color scheme is determined with high probability. Such a setting is, for example, the variation of the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the 2R probability change (latency) big hit of 5 is specified, the 2R probability change (surprise) big hit of 6 is specified, or the 2R normal big hit of non-specific 2 is set. Each stop mode (stop symbol) shows a 2R jackpot symbol, and after each long open 2R jackpot game state is controlled, it is controlled during probability change (high probability state), short time or normal (low probability state). This is particularly effective when a game effect (latent effect) in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the probability change is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (so-called internal probability change state). That is, in the case where a game effect in which the current gaming state is difficult to determine is displayed, if the hold display mode is displayed with a color scheme with a high expectation level of the big hit, the probability that the current gaming state is probabilistic increases, and the big hit It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the gaming state.

  In step S304, it is determined that the hold notice effect is to be executed (YES). When the type of the hold notice pattern is determined in step S306, the determined hold notice pattern is set (step S307), and the reserved notice pattern is set. The hold display in the first display area 1401a is added with the based color scheme, and is lit / flashed (step S308). When the hold display in the first display area 1401a is added and turned on / flashes, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is controlled with a color scheme based on the hold notice pattern (step S309). That is, except for the hold notice pattern that starts the hold notice effect in advance only by the display form of the light emitting decoration unit 2105, when the hold display form blinks in the basic color, the display form of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 also blinks. When the hold display mode lights in blue, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 flashes in blue. When the hold display mode lights up in green, the display mode of the light emission decoration unit 2105 flashes in green. When the on-hold display mode is lit in red, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 blinks in red. When the on-hold display mode is lit in rainbow color, the display mode of the light-emitting decoration unit 2105 is rainbow color. Blinks at. Unlike the on-hold display mode, the display mode of the light-emitting decoration unit 2105 always flashes. However, except for the on-hold notification effect, the light-emitting decoration unit 2105 is used as a light-emitting decoration. It is because it becomes assimilated with the light-emitting decoration around the light-emitting decoration unit 2105 only by lighting with a color matching the color, and it becomes impossible to determine whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed.

  Next, in the hold state display unit control process, control is performed to shift the hold display in the first display area 1401a every time the start condition for the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start condition related to the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is established, and the reserved memory managed on the main control board 4100 side is digested (step S311). If it is determined in step S311 that the hold memory is not used (NO), the hold display in the first display area 1401a is not shifted (erased), and the hold notice effect control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S311 that the hold memory is to be consumed (YES), it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed (step S312), and it is determined that the hold notice effect is being executed. (YES), the hold display that is not the target of the hold notice effect is shifted, and the hold display that is the object of the hold notice effect is shifted and turned on with a color scheme based on the hold notice pattern set in step S307. Flashes (step S313). However, when the hold display that is the target of the hold notice effect is digested, the hold display is deleted from the first display area 1401a. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display subject to the hold notice effect is changed, the display form of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is updated and controlled to the color scheme based on the hold notice pattern set in step S307 (step S314). Even when the hold display that is the target of the hold notice effect is digested, the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 immediately before digestion is controlled during the digestion of the hold display. Further, when the hold display that is the target of the hold notice effect is digested in the first display area 1401a, the hold display is deleted, but the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 immediately before digestion is maintained during the digest of the hold display. By controlling in this way, even if the final hold display mode is missed, it is possible to confirm the jackpot expectation degree with respect to the decorative display variation display based on the hold display by looking at the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105. It is possible to play the game with peace of mind during execution of the hold notice effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S311 that the hold notice effect is not being executed (NO), the hold display in the first display area 1401a is only shifted (erased) (step S315).

  In the hold notice pattern of this example, when the execution of the hold notice effect is decided, the light emitting decoration unit 2105 does not light up the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a with a color scheme suggesting a big hit expectation degree. Only the display mode may be set to light up with a color scheme that suggests the expected degree of jackpot (so-called “gase” is set). In this hold notice effect pattern, even if the hold is exhausted, the color arrangement in the hold display mode in the first display area 1401a is not changed, and the same big hit expectation is obtained as when the hold notice effect is not executed. When this hold notice pattern is set, the hold notice effect using the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is frequently executed, and the big hit expectation degree for the display of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 is lowered, whereas the first display area 1401a. The expectation of jackpot for the hold display in the first display area 1401a is increased without frequently executing the hold notice effect using the hold display at. For this reason, with respect to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (the hold display in the first display area 1401a), the player can pay attention without worrying about “gase” when executing the hold notice effect. On the other hand, with respect to the display of the light emitting decoration unit 2105, since there is “gase” at the time of execution of the hold notice effect, it is provided in a place where attention is not paid to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the game area 605, Only players who do not want to miss all of the on-hold notice effects will pay attention. That is, when playing a game by paying attention only to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in accordance with how the player enjoys the game, and a game area including the light emitting decoration unit 2105 separated from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is possible to select a case where a game is played while paying attention to the entirety of 605, and the original interest of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the hold notice effect of this example, when the hold notice pattern numbers 6 and 10 when the hold 3 is lit and the hold notice pattern numbers 8 and 13 when the hold 4 is lit are executed, The mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a is set so as to change with a different color scheme without interlocking with the mode of the hold display in the first display area 1401a, but is not limited to the color scheme. For example, the first display area It is set so as to indicate whether or not the hold display mode in 1401a and the flashing mode as the display mode of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 are synchronized (for example, each lighting interval is the same). Also good. When the hold notice pattern is executed, the flashing mode in the hold notice effect is synchronized only when the player pays attention to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 including the hold display in the first display area 1401a. Since it cannot be recognized whether or not the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the display of the light emitting decoration unit 2105 can be noticed.

[10. Shortening changes during hold notice during short-running state]
As described above, when the reach is determined to be displayed by comparing the reach determination value with the reach random number, the reach of the symbol that is displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed, and then the reach effect is executed and the display result is displayed. Derived display. Usually, by executing the reach effect, the expectation for the big hit can be raised, and the game entertainment can be improved. However, in the above short-time state (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state), the player wants to generate a big hit in a short time, so the reach performance is executed over a long period of time. In such a case, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced.

  For this reason, in this example, it is determined that the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value with the reach random number during the time reduction state, and that it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Even in this case, the variation pattern that executes the reach effect over a long period of time is not selected in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process). As a result, the fluctuation display for a short time is executed and the display result is derived and displayed in the same manner as the fluctuation fluctuation in the short-time state, so that the number of winnings per unit time is increased by speeding up the game progress (holding up) in the short-time state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the execution of the reach effect over a long period of time. However, on the other hand, there is a possibility that the gaming effect will be lowered due to a reduction in the effect of not performing the reach effect. Therefore, in this example, when the hold notice effect is executed between the case where it is determined that the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value and the reach random number during the time reduction state, and the case where it is determined that the jackpot is based on the special random number. Only when the determination is made, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect over a long period of time is not selected in the variation pattern setting process. As a result, when the hold notice effect is executed in the short-time state, the display of the display result is derived by executing the short-time fluctuation display in the same manner as the off-change, so that the game progress (hold-up) in the short-time state is accelerated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest. Moreover, since the fall of a production effect can be suppressed by performing a reservation notice production, even if it does not perform a reach production, the fall of a game entertainment charm can be suppressed.

  In this example, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the non-short-time state is set to about 10 seconds (when there is no hold), and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the time-short state is about 5 seconds ( No hold). When the hold notice effect is executed in the short time state, about 5 seconds of fluctuation display may be executed in the same manner as the fluctuation display fluctuation time that is out of time, or shorter than the fluctuation display fluctuation time that is out of time. You may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display of time (for example, about 2 second). By making the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display fluctuation time that is out of place, the game progress (holding digestion) in the short time state can be further accelerated, and a novel production can be executed, so the gaming interest is reduced. It is possible to further enhance the deterrent effect.

  In addition to the above-mentioned control (a control for executing a short-time variation display and deriving and displaying a display result in the same manner as a shift variation when executing a holding notice effect in a short time state), light emission by a lamp / LED (flash, etc.) , Or by outputting sound effects (such as “Dawn !!”) from the speakers 121, 391, it is possible to compensate for the reduction in the production effect by not performing the reach production, and to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest it can.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, the player hits the right in the time-short state, and the winning rate to the second start port 2002 in the time-short state is higher than that of the conventional left-handed gaming machine. For this reason, a so-called death ball is generated in which the winning to the second starting port 2002 after reaching the upper limit (four) of the number of holdings is not held due to the variable display being performed over a long time in the short time state. The rate of playing is higher than that of conventional left-handed gaming machines. By performing the above control (control to execute a short time variation display and derive a display result when performing a hold notice effect in a short time state and to display a display result) Since there is also an effect that can be reduced, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In the above example, the variation pattern that executes the reach announcement is selected only when it is determined that the hold notice effect is executed in the time-saving state. However, the reach effect is executed even when the hold notice effect is not executed. If it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to not being performed, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect may not be selected. For example, when the display effect is derived and displayed by executing a notice effect during a short time variation display or the like, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. In addition, even if the reach effect is not executed at all in a short time state, the hold notice effect is not executed if the decrease in the effect of the effect due to not executing the reach effect can be suppressed by executing the hold notice effect. Even in this case, the reach effect may not be executed.

[11. Production during the big hit game state]
In this example, the number of consecutive big hits during the jackpot gaming state (so-called ream-chan count; the high probability state (high probability short-time state) executed after the jackpot gaming state ends) An effect display that suggests the number of occurrences; Specifically, in an effect that is executed for each round in the jackpot gaming state, in this example, an effect in which the monkey character 1400a appears from the right side of the liquid crystal and moves to the left side of the liquid crystal, Next to the character 1400a, a banana character 1400b that suggests the number of consecutive big hits is displayed from the right side of the liquid crystal and moved to the left side of the liquid crystal. In this example, the number of banana characters 1400b corresponding to the number of consecutive big hits is displayed. For example, if the number of consecutive big hits is 2, the game is in the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 227 (FIG. 227 (A)), and when each round is started (FIG. 227 (B), one round is started in this example. The monkey character 1400a is displayed from the right part of the liquid crystal and moved and displayed on the left part of the liquid crystal (FIG. 227 (C)). In addition, two banana characters 1400b are displayed from behind the monkey character 1400a and moved and displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal (FIGS. 227 (D) and (E)). As a result, the player can grasp the number of continuations of the big hit, and can play the game aiming at further continuation of the big hit.

  When the main control MPU 4100a stops and displays the big hit symbol in the special symbol stop processing (first special symbol stop processing, second special symbol stop processing), the main control MPU 4100a adds 1 to a counter for continuing the big hit continuation count (for example, the first special symbol stop processing). The counter is added in step S192 of the stop process and the corresponding step in the second special symbol stop process). In the special symbol stop process (first special symbol stop process, second special symbol stop process), if the short-time end flag is set when the shift symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the high-probability state is ended. The counter is reset (the counter is reset at step S188 of the first special symbol stop process and the step corresponding to the second special symbol stop process). This cumulatively counts the number of times that the jackpot has been hit again during the high probability state, can be reset when the high probability state is terminated, can grasp the number of continuation of the jackpot, and produces an effect according to the number of bonanza continuations indicated by the counter Make it executable.

  In this example, the effect is executed in all rounds executed in the big hit gaming state to suggest the number of consecutive big hits. Therefore, even if the effect is missed in any round and the number of banana characters 1400b cannot be grasped, it can be confirmed in the subsequent rounds. In addition, not only what performs the said effect in all rounds performed in a big hit game state, You may perform the said effect in several rounds among the rounds performed in a big hit game state. Moreover, the round in which the said effect is performed may be a predetermined round (for example, odd number round), or may be determined at random.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a right-hand hit during the big hit gaming state, and is set so that the winning ratio to the big winning opening 2333a is high. In the above production, not all characters 1400a and 1400b are displayed at a time, but by gradually displaying from the right part of the liquid crystal, it takes a certain time until all characters 1400a and 1400b are displayed. It has become. Therefore, when 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2333a in a big hit game state round in a short time, the above-mentioned effect is ended before all the banana characters 1400b appear. That is, the display of the number of consecutive big hits can be adjusted according to the player's intention, and the player who does not want to know the number of consecutive big hits wins 10 game balls in the big winning opening 2333a early in the round. While the player can finish the game on the way, the player who wants to know the number of continuations of the jackpot will adjust the launch of the game ball so that 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2333a at a later stage of the round. Can be executed to the end to display the number of consecutive big hits.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is executed a plurality of times at a predetermined rate (very rarely) if the variable display control that is put on hold during the jackpot gaming state includes the pre-judgment information that is a jackpot. In any of the effects, one of the characters 1400a and 1400b or a predetermined number of characters 1400a and 1400b is displayed in white. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the variable display control that is a big hit is included in the variable display control that is put on hold (so-called on-hold reams). It is possible to draw attention to the above production while keeping expectations for Ren-chan.

  It should be noted that the above effect suggests that the number of consecutive big hits is indicated by sequentially displaying and disappearing a predetermined number of characters 1400a and 1400b, and it is sufficient that a certain period of time is required until the number of consecutive big hits is determined. It is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, a control for causing a predetermined character to disappear after being displayed for a certain period of time is performed by switching a plurality of characters in order (specifically, the monkey character 1400a is disappeared after being exposed for a certain period, Continuing the big hit by letting the character 1400b disappear after being exposed for a certain period, and then disappearing after the banana character 1400b is exposed for a certain period (a predetermined number of characters are switched and displayed in a predetermined order) You may make it suggest the number of continuation of jackpot by the production | presentation which suggests 2 times).

[12. 4th generation chance mode]
As described above, in this example, after the end of the big hit gaming state, the specific 1 5R probability variation big hit, the specific 2 11R probability variation big hit, and the specific 3 11R probability big change are controlled until the special symbol variation display is executed 88 times. There is an upper limit on the number of fluctuations that can be controlled in a short state with high probability such as big hit. Peripheral control MPU 4140a counts the number of times of special symbol variation display executed in a high-probability short-time state (specifically, counts the number of times a command for instructing execution of a variation pattern is received from main control MPU 4100a), and has a high probability. The number of remaining fluctuation display times in the short time state is notified to the player by voice output (for example, “remaining 50 times”) or display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (for example, “remaining 50 times”). In this example, when the remaining number of times reaches 50, a notification to that effect is sent, and then every time the remaining variable display number decreases by 10 times (40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times), and the remaining 5 times Notify once for each variable display until once.

  Further, in this example, when the high probability short-time state is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a draws a lottery to determine whether or not to control the 4th regeneration chance mode, which will be described later. The remaining number of times is notified except for 4 times out of 88 variable display times that can be executed in the short time probability state. For example, when not controlling to the 4th generation chance mode, the player is notified of the remaining variation display count in the high probability short-time state so that it matches the actual remaining variation display count (the actual remaining variation display count in the high-probability short-time state is In the case of 50 times, the player is notified that the remaining variation display count is 50 times), but when controlling to the 4th generation chance mode, the player is in a high-probability time-short state so that it is 4 times less than the actual remaining variation display count. Of the remaining variation display number is notified (when the actual remaining variation display number of the high probability short-time state is 54 times, the player is notified of the remaining variation display number of 50 times). Then, when controlling to the 4th generation chance mode, when the 84 fluctuation display is finished, the player is made to have the illusion that the high probability state is extended until the 4th fluctuation display is executed. Thus, the control is controlled to the 4th-generation regenerative chance mode that draws attention to the four fluctuation displays.

  Here, the 4th generation chance mode is a player who is disappointed by replacing the “death” of “death regeneration” with “4” and displaying the word “4 times” and notifying that the high-probability time-short state has ended. On the other hand, when the speaker 121, 391 outputs "start 4th generation chance mode!" And displays "start 4th generation chance mode!" On the liquid crystal display device 1400, it is highly probable over the display of four more fluctuations. Misunderstood that a chance to reverse once was given by shifting to a mode that controls the state (displaying the background, sound, etc. in a different manner than usual) This is intended to prevent the decline in the entertainment interest of the game. More specifically, after the special symbol variation display is executed 84 times after the big hit gaming state is finished, the alive regeneration chance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The display effect is executed four times with the effect of presentation being enhanced by making the above different from usual. In addition, the symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are out of the symbol, and a predetermined combination (“1”, “3”, and “5” of the left middle right symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. When the display stops at a combination of symbols including all of “”, the speaker 121, 391 outputs “one cry!” And the liquid crystal display device 1400 suddenly starts a reach effect. As a result, it is possible to give an impact to the player, and to pay attention to the four fluctuation displays executed during the starting fourth-generation chance mode, while keeping the expectation for the stop of the specific combination. Attention can be paid to the variable display executed by the display device 1400.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example normally performs control (holding shortening control) that shortens the variation time according to the number of holdings. Specifically, when the first special symbol hold number is “3” when the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of place during the non-time-short state is executed, the hold number is “2” or less. Is also shortened to 5 seconds, and is about 5 seconds. If the number of retained symbols of the first special symbol is “4”, the number of retained times is shortened by 7 seconds to about 3 seconds from the fluctuation time of “2” or less. In addition, if the second special symbol holding number is “3” when executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which is shifted during the non-short-time state, the number of holdings is “2” or less for five seconds. It is shortened to about 5 seconds, and if the number of retained symbols of the second special symbol is “4”, the number of retained symbols is shortened by about 7 seconds from the fluctuation time of “2” or less to about 3 seconds. In addition, if the number of holdings of the first special symbol is “3” when executing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is out of place during the time-shortening state, the number of holdings is shortened by 2 seconds from the fluctuation time of “2” or less. Thus, if the number of holdings of the first special symbol is “4”, the number of holdings is shortened by 3 seconds from the fluctuation time of “2” or less to about 2 seconds. In addition, if the number of second special symbol hold is “3” when the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of place in the time-short state is executed, the number of hold is shortened by 2 seconds from the fluctuation time of “2” or less Thus, if the number of holdings of the second special symbol is “4”, the number of holdings is shortened by 3 seconds from the fluctuation time of “2” or less, and becomes about 2 seconds.

  On the other hand, the above-described hold shortening control is not performed in the start 4th regeneration chance mode. That is, in the four fluctuation display executed in the starting fourth regeneration chance mode, the fluctuation time is not shortened, and the fluctuation display is performed with a fluctuation time of about 5 seconds as in the case where the number of holds is “2” or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start-up 4th generation chance mode from ending immediately, and to maintain the game entertainment for a certain period.

  In addition, when the main control MPU 4100a determines to reach by performing the reach determination during the 4th regeneration chance mode, the main control MPU 4100a deviates from the symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the specific control that is determined in advance. After stopping by the combination, it is determined as a variation pattern for executing the super reach production. As described above, since the super reach effect has a higher degree of expectation of the big hit than the normal reach effect, the player's expectation for the big hit game state can be increased when the reach is reached during the 4th-generation rebirth chance mode. In this example, the change pattern is always determined to execute the super reach effect. However, the change pattern is determined to execute the super reach effect at a rate higher than at least the change pattern determined to execute the normal reach. Anything to do.

  Further, in this example, even when starting the variable display based on the hold determined to execute the hold notice effect, the change pattern is determined to execute the super reach effect without shortening and changing. Accordingly, attention can be paid to the four fluctuation displays executed during the starting fourth regeneration chance mode.

  In addition, as a high probability state that is controlled after the big hit gaming state, both a finite high probability state where an upper limit is set on the number of controllable fluctuations and an infinite high probability state where the number of controllable fluctuations is infinite (continues until the next big hit) In the infinite high probability state, the number of remaining fluctuations in the high probability state is notified in a pseudo manner as if it were a finite high probability state, and the special symbol changes after the jackpot gaming state ends. When the display is executed 84 times, it may be controlled in a pseudo manner as in the start 4th generation chance mode. For example, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts drawing an infinitely high probability state to determine whether or not to control to a finite high probability state, and if it is decided to control to a finite high probability state, The remaining variation display count in the high probability short-time state is notified, and the variation display of the special symbol after the end of the big hit gaming state is executed 84 times, so that the remaining variation display count becomes “0”. If the game is controlled to the regeneration chance mode and no big hit is made in the starting 4 regeneration chance mode, an effect of pseudo promotion from the finite high probability short-time state to the infinite high probability state may be executed. This improves the rate of pseudo promotion from the finite high probability state to the infinite high probability state when controlled to the 4th generation chance mode, and from the finite high probability state when controlled to the 4th generation chance mode. It is possible to further expect the promotion to an infinite high probability state, and to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, when controlling to the finite high probability state, it is determined whether or not to control to the 4th generation chance mode at a predetermined ratio, and when it is determined not to control, the remaining number of times of the actual high probability state is notified, When it is determined to be controlled, the number of times except for the remaining four times in the actual high-probability state is notified, and the special symbol variation display after the end of the big hit gaming state is executed 84 times, so that the control is set to the fourth-generation chance mode You may do it. Thereby, even when controlling to the finite high probability state, it is not always controlled to the 4th generation chance mode, and the game entertainment can be improved when the 4th chance mode is controlled. In addition, when controlling to an infinitely high probability state, when controlling to a finitely high probability state, the control is always performed as if it is a 4th regeneration chance mode, thereby controlling the 4th regeneration chance mode. The rate of pseudo promotion from the finite high probability state to the infinite high probability state is improved, and the promotion from the finite high probability state to the infinite high probability state when controlled to the 4th generation chance mode. It can be expected even more and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Note that the timing of pseudo promotion from the finite high probability state to the infinite high probability state is not limited to the above, but from the start of the control for the 4th generation chance mode to the end of the control for the 4th generation chance mode. Any timing (e.g., from the finite high probability state to the infinite high probability state when the Nth (N = 1 to 4) fluctuation display is completed in the four fluctuation displays executed in the starting 4th regeneration mode) In this case, the smaller the remaining number of variable displays executed in the 4th generation chance mode, the higher the infinite height from the finite high probability state. A tie that performs an effect of pseudo-promotion from a finite high-probability state to an infinite high-probability state using a table that is set to increase the rate at which the effect of pseudo-promotion to a probability state is executed As a result, in the early stage of the 4th generation chance mode (when the number of variable display operations to be executed is small), the big hit is expected, but the remaining number of high probability states is small. As it is possible to produce an effect that matches the psychological state of the player who wishes to continue the high probability state, the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, when controlling to the infinitely high probability state, the 4th chance to start the 4th generation without executing the effect of artificially promoting the state from the finite high probability state to the infinitely high probability state during the 4th generation chance mode in the predetermined rate. Even after notifying that the control of the high-probability state has ended by ending the mode, a predetermined number of times (for example, a randomly determined number among 1 to 10 times or a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times)) When a variable display is executed or when a predetermined period (for example, a randomly determined time of 10 seconds to 3 minutes or a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute)) elapses, an infinitely high probability state is simulated. You may notify that it controls to a high-probability state by performing the effect promoted to. As a result, even when the quasi-probability state is not pseudo-promoted from the finite high-probability state during the wake-up 4th chance mode, the expectation for the high-probability state can be held for a certain period. It is possible to make it difficult to stop the game for a certain period after the chance mode is ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Further, in the above-described 4th generation chance mode, when the symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are out of place and stopped in a predetermined combination of symbols, the reach effect is suddenly started. It is not limited to this. For example, a reach effect may be executed when a symbol variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the 4th regeneration chance mode reaches a reach state, or the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be displayed in the 4th regeneration chance mode. When the symbols that are variably displayed are out of place and stopped in a predetermined combination of symbols, the symbols may be variably displayed again, and then a reach state may be generated to start a reach effect.

  In addition, the hold notice effect may not be executed for the hold that is the target of the start 4th generation chance mode. As a result, even when the hold notice effect is not executed, the expectation for the big hit can be given, and the expectation for the starting fourth generation chance mode can be improved. In other words, in the hold notice effect, the expectation for the big hit can be given to the hold that is the subject of the hold notice effect, while the expectation for the big hit is lost for the hold that is not the subject of the hold notice effect. Since there is a drawback that there is a possibility of causing a hold, the change display executed in the wake-up 4th chance mode, which increases the expectation for the big hit, includes the hold that is the target of the hold notice effect. If not, there is a risk of losing anticipation for the big hit, and possibly also losing expectation for the 4th generation chance mode. By configuring so that it does not, the equivalent value for all four fluctuation display executed during the 4th chance mode Configured to have, it can inspire expectations for big hit without giving disparity for every variable display 4 times. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a also counts the number of display changes of the special symbol executed in a high probability state, and determines whether or not to execute the hold notice effect according to the established start prize based on the start prize. If the variable display executed in this time corresponds to between 84 times to “88” of the variable display executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, it may be determined that the hold notice effect is not executed. Or, it is possible to execute the reach effect until it is determined that the number of fluctuation display executed after the end of the big hit gaming state has reached “84 times” until it reaches “88 times”, and the fluctuation for a short time You may make it control so that a display is not performed.

  In addition, in the high probability state before the control to the fourth regeneration chance mode, even if the symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the reach state, the variability display is performing the suspend notice effect. In the case of the variable display based on, the display result is derived with a shorter variation time than when the reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect. By configuring not to execute the hold notice effect for the hold that is the target of the chance mode, it is possible to prevent the start of the 4th generation chance mode that is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in the high probability state from being immediately ended. The expectation for the big hit can be maintained until the last variation display in the high probability state is finished, and the decrease in the game entertainment interest can be suppressed.

[13. Fraud detection]
In the 16 ms steady process, processes other than the above-described steps S601 to S606, such as a timer update process, a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process, a magnet spot notification determination process, and a start opening prize abnormality notification process, are also executed. The start opening prize abnormality notification determination process, the magnet goto notification determination process, and the start opening prize abnormality notification process will be described in order.

  Next, the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start-up prize abnormality notification determination process executed as one process of a 16 ms steady process. When the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not there is a start opening prize command as shown in FIG. 228 (step S840). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the various commands from the main control board 4100 analyzed in the command analysis process in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the mouth winning command corresponds to the first starting port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2001. That is, in step S840, it is not determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 2002 arranged at the lower right of the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered 2001.

  When the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 2011 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 in step S840 is included in the various commands received from the main control board 4100, the start port winning is determined. The value 1 is added to the value of the command reception counter PCC (increment. Step S842). The start port winning command reception counter PCC is a counter that counts the number of times the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 is received. The value 0 is set as the initial value at the time of power-on, reset, etc.

  On the other hand, when the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 2011 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 in step S840 is not included in the various commands received from the main control board 4100, or Subsequent to step S842, it is determined whether or not the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes (step S844). This counter initialization timer TMR is a timer for initializing the start opening winning command reception counter PCC every predetermined period of 15 minutes, and is counted in a timer update process (not shown) in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. Has been. That is, the counter initialization timer TMR is timed every 16 ms, which is 16 ms steady processing. In the timer update process, when the start of counting of the counter initialization timer TMR is set, the counting of the counter initialization timer TMR is started. The counter initialization timer TMR is initialized upon power recovery (power-on, reset, etc.), and the start of timing is set.

  When the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes in step S844, the counter initialization timer TMR is initialized, and it is determined whether or not the start opening winning command reception counter PCC is equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (step S846). This upper limit value LMT is a value determined based on an upper limit value of the number of times that a game ball can enter the first start port 2001 per unit time (referred to as “unit start number”). In this embodiment, although depending on the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, even if the player actually starts the game, considering that the unit start number is about 7 times / min at the maximum, 10 times / minute is set as an assumed value of the number of unit starts. Thereby, the upper limit value LMT becomes a value 150 (= 15 minutes × unit start number (10 times / minute)) when the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes.

  When the start port winning command reception counter PCC is equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (value 150) in step S846 (when the starting port winning command reception counter PCC has reached the upper limit value LMT), a timer for measuring the notification time is used. A start of timing of a certain notification timer HTMR is set, and start opening prize abnormality notification processing is performed (step S848). Although detailed description will be given later in this start port winning abnormality notifying process, various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light based on the timed notification timer HTMR, and the first start port 2001. The hall clerk is informed that the number of game balls entering the ball exceeds the estimated number of unit starts.

  On the other hand, when the start port winning command reception counter PCC is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (value 150) in step S846 (when the starting port winning command reception counter PCC has not reached the upper limit value LMT), or following step S848. , The value of the start opening winning command reception counter PCC is initialized by setting it to 0 (step S850), the counter initialization timer TMR is reset and initialized, the start of timing is set again (step S852), and this routine is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, if the counter initialization timer TMR has not passed 15 minutes in step S844, this routine is ended as it is.

  In this way, every time 15 minutes elapse, the start port winning command reception counter PCC can be initialized in step S850, so that the game ball entering the first start port 2001 in step S846 is assumed to have a unit start number. A determination of whether the value is exceeded can be made every 15 minutes. That is, it is possible to monitor every 15 minutes whether or not the game ball entering the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit start number. Thus, for example, by aiming at the timing when one game ball enters the first start port 2001, the radio wave transmitter emits radio waves from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the first start port 2001. One detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 input to the control board 4100 is divided into a plurality of detection signals, and a plurality of game balls enter the first start port 2001 (referred to as “joint ball”). ) Even if a fraudulent act pretending to be performed is performed, the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 2001 exceeds the assumed number of unit starting numbers according to the determination in step S846 performed every 15 minutes. When it is, the hall opening clerk abnormality notifying process of step S848 can be used to notify the hall clerk or the like that the cheating is being performed by causing various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 or the game board 4 to emit light. It has become the jar. For this reason, the player is forced to stop the act for fear of such an illegal act, and it is extremely difficult to continue. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of illegal game balls acquired by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 and the like is compared between the first and third times in the switch processing in step S12 in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 207 (b). The first start port sensor 2011 avoids erroneous detection due to chattering, noise, or the like by performing reading twice, that is, reading twice and reading twice compared for the second time to the fourth time. The reliability of the detection signal from the etc. is improved. Therefore, even if one detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 input to the main control board 4100 is irradiated with a radio wave transmitter toward the first start port 2001 and divided into a plurality of detection signals. If the waveform of the divided detection signal does not match the actual waveform of the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 when a game ball is connected to the first start port 2001, the split is performed. The detected signal waveform is removed by this switch processing as being caused by chattering or noise. In the switch process, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The start opening prize command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the information output process of step S18 in the timer interrupt process shown in b). As described above, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, and the like, the program incorporated in the switch process prevents illegal acts of irradiating the first start port 2001 with the radio wave with the radio wave transmitter. Therefore, even if the fraudulent act is performed, the start port winning command corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 is always stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is not to say. In other words, the number of start opening prize commands stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area does not necessarily increase according to the illegal act. However, when one detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 is divided into a plurality of detection signals due to the fraud, some of the detection signals may pass through the switch process. . In such a case, the detected detection signal is judged as a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011, and the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the peripheral control board 4140 side, the start opening prize command corresponding to the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 2011 in the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process shown in FIG. Based on the received number, it is determined every 15 minutes whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit start number. It is possible to monitor whether or not a game ball is illegally entered, that is, whether or not there is an illegal act.

  By the way, as a fraudulent act, in addition to the above-described one that radiates a radio wave toward the first start port 2001 with a radio wave transmitter, an area of the game area 605 other than the area RA to the area RD shown in FIG. In a region where no approach is detected, a magnet is applied to the surface of the glass unit 450, and a game ball is applied to the surface of the glass unit 450 so that a game ball enters the warp inlet 2310 shown in FIG. By receiving the game balls flowing down 605, stacking the game balls flowing down one after another into a “grape-like” state having a certain size, and releasing the magnet, The game balls flowing down along the gathered portion are guided to the warp inlet 2310 and passed through the warp passage 2316 to roll up the shelf unit 3300. Magnet Goto, etc. of increasing the probability that the ball entrance to the first start hole 2001 send it to 3302a, there are a variety. For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko machines can respond to known illegal acts with mechanisms, electrical circuits, programs, etc., but prevent unknown illegal acts that exceed the manufacturer's assumptions. It is difficult to build. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011, the start that was originally prepared for notifying mainly by voice. By using the winning prize command and the program on the main control board 4100 side originally incorporated in the switch process in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering, noise, etc. By repeatedly determining every 15 minutes whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit start number in the program on the control board 4140 side, It is prevention. Although an illegal game ball is acquired by the player due to an unknown illegal act, as described above, the presence or absence of an illegal act is repeatedly monitored every 15 minutes by the program called start opening prize abnormality notification determination process on the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, if there is an illegal act, various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light to notify the store clerk of the hall. Therefore, it is necessary to stop the unknown fraud, and the unknown fraud cannot be repeated. Therefore, even if an unknown illegal act is performed, the number of illegal game balls acquired by the player can be suppressed.

  As described above, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 600, but a game ball is accidentally caught between the obstacle nails and the obstacle nails, and one after another on the game balls. There are cases where a game ball is formed in a grape shape on the game ball. Depending on the place where such a lump is formed, there may be a route for guiding the game ball to the first starting port 2001. Even if the game is continued in such a state, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed unit start number, Since various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light and notify the store clerk or the like of the hall, the player has to stop the act. Therefore, even if a path for guiding the game ball to the first starting port 2001 is formed using the block of game balls in a grape shape, the number of game balls acquired by the player through this path can be suppressed. .

  Next, the magnet gossip notification determination process will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the magnet gossell notification determination process executed as one process of the 16 ms steady process. When the magnet goto notification determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not there is a magnetic sensor abnormality command as shown in FIG. 229 (step S855). In this determination, whether or not the various commands from the main control board 4100 analyzed in the command analysis process in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. Determine whether.

  When the magnetic sensor abnormality command is not included in step S855, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor abnormality command is included in step S855, the notification timer HTMR which is a timer for measuring the notification time described above is set. The start of timing is set, start opening prize abnormality notification processing is performed (step S857), and this routine is finished. Although detailed description will be given later in this start port winning abnormality notifying process, various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light based on the timed notification timer HTMR, and the first start port 2001. The hall clerk is informed that the number of game balls entering the ball exceeds the estimated number of unit starts.

  Next, the start opening prize abnormality notification process will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start opening prize abnormality notification process executed as one process of a 16 ms steady process. As described above, the starting port winning abnormality notifying process is executed when the starting port winning command reception counter PCC has reached the upper limit value LMT or when a magnetic sensor abnormal command is transmitted that indicates that a magnet has been detected. Process.

  When the start opening prize abnormality notification process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the notification timer HTMR has passed 5 minutes as shown in FIG. 230 (step S860). The notification timer HTMR is a timer for measuring the notification time, and is measured in a timer update process (not shown) in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. That is, the notification timer HTMR is timed every 16 ms, which is the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process. In the timer update process, when the time measurement start of the notification timer HTMR is set, the time measurement of the notification timer HTMR is started. The notification timer HTMR is initialized when power is restored (when power is turned on, reset, etc.).

  When the notification timer HTMR has not passed 5 minutes in step S860, the light emitting mode (for example, the mode of emitting red light) is set to turn on all the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (step S862). This routine ends. In step S862, the peripheral control MPU 4140 determines that this routine is executed via the above-described start opening prize abnormality notification determination process, that is, that the start opening prize command reception counter PCC has reached the upper limit value LMT. In this case, the sound source IC 4140c is controlled to read out the start opening winning abnormality notification sound from the sound ROM 4140d, and the control is performed in parallel with the flow from the side speaker 121. If the peripheral control MPU 4140 receives a magnetic sensor abnormality command indicating that the magnetic got has been detected, the sound source IC 4140c is controlled to read out the magnetic goat alarm sound from the sound ROM 4140d and flow from the side speaker 121. Also in parallel.

  On the other hand, when the notification timer HTMR has passed 5 minutes in step S860, the various lights provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 that are all lit in step S862 are returned to the light emission mode in the gaming state, and the notification timer HTMR. Is initialized by resetting (step S864), and this routine is terminated. In step S864, the peripheral control MPU 4140 determines that this routine is executed via the above-mentioned start opening prize abnormality notification determination process, that is, that the start opening prize command reception counter PCC has reached the upper limit value LMT. In this case, the routine is executed via the magnet goto notification determination process described above, while the control for flowing the start opening prize abnormality notification sound from the side speaker 121 is terminated and returned to the predetermined game sound in the gaming state. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 4140 receives a magnetic sensor abnormality command informing that the magnetic goto has been detected, even if the notification timer HTMR has passed 5 minutes, Continue control to flow. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140 resumes the control that causes the magnet goto alarm sound even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off and turned on again. For this reason, by operating the RAM clear switch 624a provided on the main control board 4100 at the same time when the power switch 1137 provided on the power supply board 1136 is turned on by the hall clerk or the like, the peripheral where the RAM clear command is received from the main control board 4100 The control MPU 4140 is configured to cancel the control that causes the magnet goto alarm sound to flow.

  In step S862, the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are all lit, so that the presence of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is fully lit is made more conspicuous than the other pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. Can be easily noticed by shop assistants. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is fully lit can be found at an early stage after the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 start to be fully lit. Tell the hall clerk, etc. that the number of game balls to be played exceeds the assumed value of the number of unit starts (in this embodiment, 10 times / minute), that is, that fraudulent acts are or are likely be able to.

  In the present embodiment, a one-step light emission notification mode is employed in which all of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are turned on in step S862. If a multi-step flash notification mode that gradually escalates the flash mode is adopted, when the player has performed an illegal act and moves from the initial stage to the flash notification mode at a certain stage, the player further However, if the cheating is continued and a transition is made from the next stage to a full-scale flash notification mode, the flash notification mode becomes a mere “notification alarm” for the player. As described above, when the multi-level light emission notification mode is adopted, it is difficult to detect fraudulent acts by hall clerk etc. from the initial stage to the light emission notification mode at a certain stage. It may be reminiscent of the player, which is not preferable.

[14. Rendering]
Next, an effect drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect that displays a variation of a decorative symbol. First, the mechanism by which various effects drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are described briefly. The main control board 4100 receives game balls in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 ( Based on this, a lottery is performed and a command indicating a special lottery result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs control data (display command) to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control board 3181 based on the received command. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a reads various data necessary for creating an effect image from the character ROM 4150d and the character RAM 4150e of the liquid crystal control board 3181 based on the input control data (display command), and the liquid crystal control board 3181. By controlling the VDP 4150c, an image is created and drawn on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a special lottery result corresponding to a command from the main control board is derived and displayed.

  A game ball is received (entered) in the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, and when this game ball is used for the progress of the game, it is drawn over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. On the background image, variable display of the decorative symbol 1400a at the upper left of the display area, the decorative symbol 1400b at the center, and the decorative symbol 1400c at the upper right is started. The decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are semi-transparent so that the background image can be visually recognized. The decorative symbol 1400a is displayed from the upper left to the lower left of the display region, the decorative symbol 1400b is displayed from the upper to the lower portion of the display region, and the decorative symbol 1400c is displayed. The display is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right to the lower right of the area.

  The decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are configured as a so-called dot matrix in which a plurality of dots having a square shape are arranged in combination. At the start of fluctuation, a total of 12 dots of 4 × 3 in total are combined to form the numeral “0”. ”To“ 9 ”are expressed. That is, a pseudo dot matrix display in which a dot matrix is displayed in a pseudo manner in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 having an extremely high resolution can be performed. In the present embodiment, a dot matrix in which letters and numbers are lit by drawing a specified LED out of LEDs regularly arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with extremely high resolution. It employs a mechanism that draws and expresses an image that has been reduced to a resolution equivalent to that of an LED dot matrix.

  When a game ball enters the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 and this game ball is used for the progress of the game, the decorative symbol 1400a is displayed from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, and the decorative symbol 1400b is displayed. From the top to the bottom of the display area, the decorative design 1400c is a number “4” × 3 × 3 represented by a total of 12 dots in a manner that the reel is rotating from the top right to the bottom right of the display area. 1 ”to“ 9 ”are displayed in a variable manner. When the left decorative symbol 1400a is stopped and displayed, and then the right decorative symbol 1400c is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c are the same symbol (the numbers expressed as dot matrix are the same). At some point, a reach is formed, and as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the central decorative symbol 1400b is still variably displayed.

  The central decorative symbol 1400b is different from the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c after a lapse of a predetermined time (numbers expressed as a dot matrix that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c). Is displayed in the same pattern (the same number as the number expressed as a dot matrix stopped and displayed on the decorative design 1400a and the decorative design 1400c). When the player hits the game, a big hit gaming state occurs in which a big hit is given and a profit is given to the player.

  After the reach described above is formed, as shown in FIG. 231 (b), while the central decorative symbol 1400b is displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol 1400a and the right decorative symbol 1400c are already stopped. One dot constituting the symbol changes to one divided into four small square dots. With this division, the size of the decorative design 1400a and the decorative design 1400c does not change. In this way, by changing the drawing mode in which one dot is divided into four dots, the central decorative symbol 1400b that is being variably displayed is displayed as a decorative symbol 1400a that is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. The symbol that is the same as the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400c, that is, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that in which the dots that make up the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are in the same state as when the change started. It conveys the expectation that it has become to the player. Similarly to the decorative symbols 1400a and 1400c, one dot constituting the decorative symbol 1400b also changes to a drawing mode divided into four dots and is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that in the state in which one dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c has been changed to a drawing mode divided into four, certainly one dot is not divided into four, and when the change starts Compared with the case where the display is variably displayed in the same state, the degree of expectation that is a big hit is higher, but there are cases where it is out of place or a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (c), after one dot constituting the decorative pattern 1400a on the left side and the decorative pattern 1400c on the right side is changed to one divided into four small square dots. These four dots are further changed to those divided into four small square dots. In other words, at the start of the variable display, one dot constituting the symbol of the left decorative symbol 1400a and the right decorative symbol 1400c is changed to one divided into 16 extremely small dots having a square shape. Even in this division, the sizes of the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c do not change. In this way, by changing to a drawing mode in which one dot is divided into 16 dots, the central decorative symbol 1400b that is being variably displayed is displayed as a decorative symbol 1400a that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The symbol that is the same as the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400c, that is, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that in a state where one dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is divided into four. It conveys the expectation that it has become to the player. Similarly to the decorative symbols 1400a and 1400c, one dot constituting the decorative symbol 1400b also changes to a drawing mode divided into 16 dots and is stopped and displayed. In addition, in a state where one dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is changed to a drawing mode in which it is divided into 16 pieces, it is certainly displayed in a state where one dot is divided into 4 pieces. Although the degree of expectation that is a big hit is higher than the case, it may be out of place or a big hit.

  In this way, the liquid crystal display device 1400 having a very high resolution capable of rendering the variation display mode of the normal symbol is produced by using the variation display mode using the pseudo dot matrix display which is different from the normal symbol variation display mode. By doing so, since it is possible to change from a simple symbol variation display to a novel symbol variation display, the player does not feel that the effect of symbol variation display is monotonous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the symbol display.

  Further, after the left decorative design 1400a and the right decorative design 1400c are the same design (the numbers expressed as a dot matrix are the same) and the reach is formed, the central decorative design 1400b is still displayed in a variable manner. In the state, it is possible to tell the player that the more the one dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is finely divided, the higher the chance of winning a big hit. It is possible to give a player a novel feeling with respect to the fluctuation display.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the liquid crystal display device 1400, the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140, and the liquid crystal control board 3181 are provided. The liquid crystal display device 1400 has a display area in which the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c can be displayed in a variable manner. When the main control board 4100 receives a game ball at the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2002 (starts winning), the main control board 4100 performs a lottery based on this and gives a command indicating the special lottery result of the peripheral control board 4140. Transmit to the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs control data (display command) to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control board 3181 based on the received command. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a reads various data necessary for creating an effect image from the character ROM 4150d and the character RAM 4150e of the liquid crystal control board 3181 based on the input control data (display command), and the liquid crystal control board 3181. By controlling the VDP 4150c, an image is created and drawn on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a special lottery result corresponding to a command from the main control board is derived and displayed.

  The decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are configured as a so-called dot matrix in which a plurality of dots having a square shape are arranged in combination. At the start of fluctuation, a total of 12 dots of 4 × 3 in total are combined to form the numeral “0”. ”To“ 9 ”are expressed. That is, a pseudo dot matrix display in which a dot matrix is displayed in a pseudo manner in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 having an extremely high resolution can be performed. In the present embodiment, a dot matrix in which letters and numbers are lit by drawing a specified LED out of LEDs regularly arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with extremely high resolution. It employs a mechanism that draws and expresses an image that has been reduced to a resolution equivalent to that of an LED dot matrix.

  In this way, the liquid crystal display device 1400 having a very high resolution capable of rendering the display mode of the normal symbol variation display is designed to display the symbol variation display using a pseudo dot matrix display that is different from the normal symbol variation display mode. By adopting a mode, it is possible to change from a simple symbol variation display to a novel symbol variation display, so that the effect of the symbol variation display is not felt to be monotonous for the player. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the symbol display.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention. For example, in the above-described embodiment, after the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 231 (b), the left decorative design 1400a, which is already stopped and displayed while the central decorative design 1400b is displayed in a variable manner, One dot composing the symbol with the decorative symbol 1400c on the right side is changed to one divided into four small dots having a square shape, and then, as shown in FIG. 231 (c), these four dots are changed. Although the dots are further changed to those divided into four square-shaped small dots, the small dots having the square shape may be changed to other shapes. FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of another effect in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. FIG. 232 (a) is similar to FIG. 231 (a). When a game ball enters the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, and this game ball is used for the progress of the game, a decorative design is displayed. 1400a is displayed from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the decorative pattern 1400b is displayed from the upper to the lower side of the display area, and the decorative pattern 1400c is displayed as if the reel is rotated from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. Numbers “1” to “9” expressed by a total of 12 dots of 4 × 3 are variably displayed. When the left decorative symbol 1400a is stopped and displayed, and then the right decorative symbol 1400c is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c are the same symbol (the numbers expressed as dot matrix are the same). At some point, a reach is formed, and the decorative pattern 1400b in the center is still variably displayed.

  The central decorative symbol 1400b is different from the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c after a lapse of a predetermined time (numbers expressed as a dot matrix that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c). Is displayed in the same pattern (the same number as the number expressed as a dot matrix stopped and displayed on the decorative design 1400a and the decorative design 1400c). When the player hits the game, a big hit gaming state occurs in which a big hit is given and a profit is given to the player.

  After the reach described above is formed, as shown in FIG. 232 (b), while the central decorative symbol 1400b is being displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol 1400a and the right decorative symbol 1400c that have already been stopped are displayed. One dot constituting the symbol changes to one divided into small dots having the shape of four heart marks. With this division, the size of the decorative design 1400a and the decorative design 1400c does not change. In this way, by changing the drawing mode in which one dot is divided into four dots, the central decorative symbol 1400b that is being variably displayed is displayed as a decorative symbol 1400a that is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. The symbol that is the same as the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400c, that is, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that in which the dots that make up the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are in the same state as when the change started. It conveys the expectation that it has become to the player. Similarly to the decorative symbols 1400a and 1400c, one dot constituting the decorative symbol 1400b also changes to a drawing mode divided into four dots and is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that in the state in which one dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c has been changed to a drawing mode divided into four, certainly one dot is not divided into four, and when the change starts Compared with the case where the display is variably displayed in the same state, the degree of expectation that is a big hit is higher, but there are cases where it is out of place or a big hit.

  FIG. 232 (c) shows a case where one dot constituting the left decorative pattern 1400a and the right decorative pattern 1400c is changed into one divided into small dots having the shape of four heart marks. Thus, these four dots are further changed to those divided into small dots having the shape of four heart marks. In other words, at the start of the variable display, one dot composing the symbol of the left decorative symbol 1400a and the right decorative symbol 1400c is changed into one divided into 16 very small dots having the shape of a heart mark. To do. Even in this division, the sizes of the decorative symbol 1400a and the decorative symbol 1400c do not change. In this way, by changing to a drawing mode in which one dot is divided into 16 dots, the central decorative symbol 1400b that is being variably displayed is displayed as a decorative symbol 1400a that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The symbol that is the same as the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 1400c, that is, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that in a state where one dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is divided into four. It conveys the expectation that it has become to the player. Similarly to the decorative symbols 1400a and 1400c, one dot constituting the decorative symbol 1400b also changes to a drawing mode divided into 16 dots and is stopped and displayed. In addition, in a state where one dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is changed to a drawing mode in which it is divided into 16 pieces, it is certainly displayed in a state where one dot is divided into 4 pieces. Although the degree of expectation that is a big hit is higher than the case, it may be out of place or a big hit.

  Thus, after the decorative pattern 1400a on the left side and the decorative pattern 1400c on the right side become the same design (the numbers expressed as a dot matrix are the same) and the reach is formed, the central decorative design 1400b is still displayed in a variable manner. In this state, the player can be informed that the more a single dot constituting the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is divided into heart-shaped shapes, the higher the possibility of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel sense to the player with respect to the change display of the symbols.

  In addition, the player may be informed that the possibility of a big hit is increased by changing from a square dot in FIG. 231 (b) to a dot having a heart symbol in FIG. 232 (b). The player may be informed that the possibility of a big hit is increased by changing from the dot having the square shape in FIG. 231 (c) to the dot having the heart mark in FIG. 232 (c). Conversely, the player may be informed that the possibility of a big hit is reduced by changing from the dot having the heart mark in FIG. 232 (b) to the dot having the square shape in FIG. 231 (b). Then, the player may be informed that the possibility of a big hit is reduced by changing from the dot having the heart mark of FIG. 232 (c) to the dot having the square shape of FIG. 231 (c). Further, the dot having the square shape in FIG. 231 (b) is changed to the dot having the heart mark in FIG. 232 (c), so that the dot having the square shape in FIG. 231 (b) is changed to the square in FIG. 231 (c). The player may be informed that the possibility of a big hit is extremely high compared to the case where the dot has a shape.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 Game board 410 Operation handle (operation handle)
600 Game panel (game board)
600e opening 602 outer rail (guide rail)
603 Inner rail (guide rail)
605 Game area 650 Hit ball launcher (launcher)
800 prize ball unit (game ball dispensing device)
2011 first start port sensor (winning state detection means)
2300 Center object (Center frame)
2300a Opening window 2349 Second start port sensor (winning state detection means)
1400 Liquid crystal display device (display means)
1401 Display screen 1401a First display area 1401b Second display area 2001 First start port 2002 Second start port (electric start port)
2201 Gate (passing gate)
2305 Rock decoration (decorative member)
2330 Grand prize opening unit (opening and closing prize device)
3011 Upper movable decorative body (movable decorative body, upper decorative body)
3013 Head guard (additional decoration)
3016 Patrol lens (light emitting means)
3017 Light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
3028 Photosensor (effect position detection means)
3101 Right movable ornament (movable ornament, right ornament)
3111 Lens part (decoration part)
3201 Left movable decorative body (movable decorative body, left decorative body)
3211 Lens part (decoration part)
4100 Main control board (lottery means, stop symbol determination means, special symbol fluctuation control means, specific profit granting means, hold / digestion means, hold status display means)
4140 Peripheral control board (display control means, hold state display means, movable control means)

Claims (3)

After the start condition is satisfied, a variable display device that variably displays the symbol information based on the start condition being satisfied and displays and displays the display result is provided. When the predetermined winning condition is satisfied, the variable display device is specified. After deriving and displaying the display result, in a gaming machine that controls to a profit granting state that gives a profit to the player,
Random number updating means for updating multiple types of random numbers;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring each random number updated by the random number update means when the start condition is satisfied;
A pre-determination unit that determines whether the winning condition is satisfied based on a winning random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring unit when the start condition is satisfied;
A preceding effect executing means for executing a preceding effect suggesting an expectation degree that the winning condition is satisfied based on a determination result of the prior determination means between the start condition and the start condition being satisfied;
Each random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, random number storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number so that the order of acquisition can be specified;
When the start condition is satisfied, a start win determination means for determining whether the winning condition is satisfied based on a winning random number for which the start condition is satisfied among the winning random numbers stored in the random number storage means;
When the winning condition determination unit determines that the winning condition is not satisfied, the display result of the variable display device is based on a reach random number that satisfies the start condition among reach random numbers stored in the random number storage unit. Start reach determination means for determining whether or not to form a reach mode;
When it is determined that the winning condition is satisfied by the start time determining means, the display result of the variable display device is determined as the specific display result, and the starting condition is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied. When the start reach determination means determines that the reach mode is to be formed, the non-specific display result with the reach mode among the non-specific display results that are different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display device. If the winning condition determining means determines that the winning condition is not satisfied and the starting reach determining means determines that the reach mode is not to be formed, the display result of the variable display device is A symbol determining means for determining a non-specific display result without the reach mode among the specific display results;
Display control means for variably displaying the symbol information on the variable display device, and for deriving and displaying a display result determined by the symbol determination means;
When it is determined that the winning condition is established by the start time winning determination means and the profit granting state is controlled, a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is generated after the profit granting state is ended. A gaming state control means capable of executing control,
The gaming state control means includes
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute control to generate a specific game state different from both the normal game state and the special game state,
The prior determination means includes
Prior reach determination means for determining whether or not to form the reach mode based on the reach random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means when it is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied when the start condition is satisfied; ,
A reach random number determined to form the reach mode by the advance reach determination unit when the special gaming state is controlled is classified into a first reach determination group, and the advance reach determination unit determines the reach state when controlling the specific gaming state. Reach random numbers determined to form a reach mode are classified into the first reach determination group or a second reach determination group different from the first reach determination group, and the prior reach determination is performed when controlling the normal gaming state. The reach random number determined to form the reach mode by means is different from the first reach determination group or the second reach determination group or the first reach determination group and the second reach determination group. Pre-reach determination group classification means for classifying into reach determination groups of
The preceding effect is
The game is executed in any of the special game state, the specific game state, and the normal game state,
Based on either the first reach determination group, the second reach determination group, or the third reach determination group classified by the advance reach determination group classification means, execution is performed at a different rate depending on each gaming state A gaming machine characterized by being played.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the starting condition is established based on a winning of a game medium at a starting port among a plurality of winning ports provided in a gaming area.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising launching means for driving a game medium toward the game area.